CATALOG Switches Potentiometers Encoders...(EVQ2) ES124 ES126 ES128 ES130 5N Type Side-operational...

2013.4 ../

CATALOG

SwitchesPotentiometersEncoders

– ES1 –

COMMON CONTENTS

Page

Push Switches, Detector Switches, Multi Function Switches, Light Touch Switches .......ES2 to ES156

CONTENTS ........................................................................................................................ ES2

INDEX ................................................................................................................................. ES4

Push Switches .................................................................................................................... ES7

Detector Switches............................................................................................................. ES19

Multi Function Switches ................................................................................................... ES54

Light Touch Switches ....................................................................................................... ES59

Rotary Potentiometers, Carbon Composition Trimmer Potentiometers, Position Sensors, Encoders .......................................................................................EV1 to ES61

CONTENTS ........................................................................................................................ EV1

INDEX ................................................................................................................................. EV2

Rotary Potentiometers........................................................................................................ EV4

Carbon Composition Trimmer Potentiometers ................................................................ EV15

Position Sensors............................................................................................................... EV25

Encoders ........................................................................................................................... EV35

Oct. 2012

– ES2 –

Product Type/Series Part Numbers Page

Common Index / Glossary of words and Terms / RoHS Directive ES4

Push Switches

Contents / Quick Selection Guide ES7

Checklist / Application Notes / Common Specifi cations / Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit ES9

ESB33 Vertical Push Switches ESB33 ES13

ESB30 Push Switches ESB30 ES15

ESE20C / 20D Momentary Push Switches ESE20C/20D ES17

Detector Switches



09HL Detector Switches ESE58 ES25

1VR Detector Switches ESE16 ES28

1VL Detector Switches ESE13 ES30



2N Detector Switches ESE22 ES40

5N Detector Switches ESE11 ES43

1HW Detector Switches ESE23 ES49

2W Detector Switches ESE24 ES51

CONTENTS

Oct. 201200

– ES3 –

Product Type/Series Part Numbers Page

Multi Function SwitchesContents / Quick Selection Guide / Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit ES54

Jog Ball EVQWJN ES57

Light Touch Switches



4 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switches EVQP6/6P6/7P6/9P6 ES66

4.5 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switches EVQPQ ES70

4.9 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switches EVQPL/3PL/5PL/PT ES73

6 mm Square Thin Type SMD Light Touch Switches EVQP0/Q2 ES76

3.0 mm2.0 mm SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAW ES80

3.0 mm2.6 mm SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAF ES83

3.5 mm2.9 mm SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAA ES86

4.7 mm3.5 mm SMD Light Touch Switches EVQP2/P9/3P2 ES89

6.0 mm3.5 mm SMD Light Touch Switches EVQPE1/PN/5P ES93

3.5 mm2.9 mm Side-operational SMD Light Touch Switches EVQP7/P3/9P7 ES95

3.5 mm2.9 mm Side-operational Half Dive / SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAN ES99

Small-sized Side-operational SMD Light Touch Switches EVQPU ES102

2.8 mm2.3 mm Side-operational Edge Mount Light Touch Switches EVPAV ES106

4.5 mm2.2 mm Side-operational Edge Mount Light Touch Switches EVPAE ES108

6.2 mm2.5 mm Side-operational Edge Mount Light Touch Switches EVQP4 ES110

6.1 mm4.0 mm Side-operational SMD Light Touch Switches EVQPS ES113

5N Type Light Touch Switches EVQPA/PB ES117

5N Type Side-operational Light Touch Switches EVQPF ES120

5N Type 2R Light Touch Switches EVQ2 ES122

5N Type Side-operational 4R Light Touch Switches EVQPC ES124

Round Type 2R Light Touch Switches EVQ11 ES126

6.0 mm3.5 mm Light Touch Switches EVQPE ES128

6.0 mm3.5 mm 2R Light Touch Switches EVQPJ ES130

Over Travel Light Touch Switches EVQP0 ES132

4 mm Square Double-action SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAH ES134

6 mm Square Thin Type Double-actionl SMD Light Touch Switches EVQPR/Q0/3PR ES137

4.7 mm3.5 mm Double-action Side-operational SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAJ ES140

6.2 mm3.7 mm Double-action Side-operational Edge Mount / SMD Light Touch Switches EVQQ0 ES143

6 mm Square Long Travel SMD Light Touch Switches EVQP0/P1/9P ES146

6 mm Square Long Travel 2 terminals SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAS ES149

6 mm Square Long Travel 2R Light Touch Switches EVQPV ES152

8 mm Square Long Travel SMD Light Touch Switches EVQQ1 ES154

8 mm Square Long Travel 2R Light Touch Switches EVQQJ ES156

10 mm Square Center Space Long Travel SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAD ES158

CONTENTS

Oct. 201200

Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use.Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately.

– ES4 –

Index

ES13 ES15 ES17 ES25

ESB33 VerticalPush Switches

(ESB33)ESB30 Push Switch es

(ESB30)

ESE20C/20DMomentary Push Switches

(ESE20C/20D)09HL Detector Switches

(ESE58)

ES28 ES30 ES33 ES38

1VR Detector Switches(ESE16)

1VL Detector Switches(ESE13)

1HL Detector Switches(ESE18)

2HL Detector Switches(ESE31)

ES40 ES43 ES49 ES51

2N Detector Switches(ESE22)

5N Detector Switches(ESE11)

1HW Detector Switches(ESE23)

2W Detector Switches(ESE24)

ES57 ES66 ES70 ES73

Jog Ball(EVQWJN)

4 mm Square SMDLight Touch Switches

(EVQP6/6P6/7P6/9P6)

4.5 mm Square SMDLight Touch Switches

(EVQPQ)

4.9 mm Square SMDLight Touch Switches(EVQPL/3PL/5PL/PT)

ES76 ES80 ES83 ES86

6 mm Square Thin Type SMD Light Touch Switches

(EVQP0/Q2)

3.0 mm2.0 mm SMDLight Touch Switches

(EVPAW)


(EVPAF)


(EVPAA)

ES89 ES93 ES95 ES99


(EVQP2/P9/3P2)


(EVQPE1/PN/5P)

3.5 mm2.9 mmSide-operational SMDLight Touch Switches

(EVQP7/P3/9P7)

3.5 mm2.9 mmSide-operational Half Dive / SMD Light Touch Switches

(EVPAN)

Oct. 201200


– ES5 –

Index

ES102 ES106 ES108 ES110

Small-sizedSide-operational SMD Light

Touch Switches(EVQPU)

2.8 mm2.3 mmSide-operational Edge Mount

Light Touch Switches(EVPAV)


Light Touch Switches(EVPAE)


Light Touch Switches(EVQP4)

ES113 ES117 ES120 ES122

6.1 mm4.0 mmSide-operational SMDLight Touch Switches

(EVQPS)5N Type Light Touch Switch es

(EVQPA/PB)

5N Type Side-operationalLight Touch Switches

(EVQPF)

5N Type 2RLight Touch Switches

(EVQ2)

ES124 ES126 ES128 ES130

5N Type Side-operational 4R Light Touch Switches

(EVQPC)

Round Type 2RLight Touch Switches

(EVQ11)

6.0 mm3.5 mmLight Touch Switches

(EVQPE)

6.0 mm3.5 mm 2RLight Touch Switches

(EVQPJ)

ES132 ES134 ES137 ES140

Over TravelLight Touch Switches

(EVQP0)

4 mm Square Double-action SMD Light Touch Switches

(EVPAH)

6 mm Square Thin TypeDouble-actionl SMDLight Touch Switches

(EVQPR/Q0/3PR)

4.7 mm3.5 mm Double-actionSide-operational

SMD Light Touch Switches(EVPAJ)

ES143 ES146 ES149 ES152

6.2 mm3.7 mm Double-actionSide-operational Edge Mount /

SMD Light Touch Switches(EVQQ0)

6 mm Square Long Travel SMD Light Touch Switches

(EVQP0/P1/9P)

6 mm Square Long Travel 2 terminals SMD

Light Touch Switches(EVPAS)

6 mm Square Long Travel2R Light Touch Switches

(EVQPV)

ES154 ES156 ES158

8 mm Square Long TravelSMD Light Touch Switches

(EVQQ1)

8 mm Square Long Travel2R Light Touch Switches

(EVQQJ)

10 mm Square Center Space Long Travel SMD

Light Touch Switches(EVPAD)

Oct. 201200


– ES6 –

A Shorting Common terminals are connected with the other one or more terminals when switching.

B Non-shorting Common terminals are connected with none of the oth er terminals.

Glossary of Words and Terms

RoHS Directive : The restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment

The products introduced in this catalog conform to the RoHS Directive* (enforced in July 2006).

(Newly ordered products will conform to the RoHS Directive.)

Please contact our sales staff for inquiries about the RoHS compliance of currently used products.

Rating Maximum working voltage and current of switches

Contact resistance Resistance value of contact position, included specifi c resistance of material and usually measured by volt age

drop at 1 A 5 Vdc.

Switching timing Two timing modes: shorting and non-shorting. The change-over sequence of each circuit for two or more circuits is expressed by this timing.

RoHS Direcive

1

Start

2 3 1 2 3 1

Next contact position

2 3

1

Start

2 3 1 2 3 1

Next contact position

2 3

Oct. 201200

Push Switches

– ES7 –

CONTENTS

Page

Quick Selection Guide ............................................................................................................ ES8

Checklist Before Inquiry .......................................................................................................... ES9

Application Notes....................................................................................................................ES10

Common Specifi cations..........................................................................................................ES11

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit.............................................................................................ES12

ESB33 Vertical Push Switches (ESB33)...............................................................................ES13

ESB30 Push Switches (ESB30) ............................................................................................ES15

ESE20C/20D Momentary Push Switches (ESE20C/20D) ...................................................ES17

Oct. 201200


Push Switches

– ES8 –

Quick Selection Guide

Country of origin

Lock Travel

Term.

Pitch

(mm)

Poles

Page

Type, Series

1.5mm

2.45mm

2.5mm

2.8mm 1 2

ESB33 Vertical Push Switches(H=6.0)

China 2.5 ES13

ESB30 Push Switches(H=12.5)

Japan 2.5 ES15

ESE20C/20D Momentary Push Switches(H=8.9)

China 6.08.0 ES17

Country of origin : As of April 2013

Oct. 201200


Push Switches

– ES9 –

When specifying Push Switches, please take advantage of our standard products for better price and delivery. Please inquire about the following items before ordering.

Checklist Before lnquiry

Item Information (Requirements)

Com

mon

C-1 Inquiry purpose New use, Modifi cation, Others ( )

C-2 Modifi cation

Previous supplier

Conventional part No.

Purpose

C-3 Application

Equipment

Environment Indoor/Outdoor use, Stationary/Portable set, High humidity, SO2, NaCl

Temperature ( °C) to ( °C)

Rating 0.1 A 12 Vdc, 0.1 A 24 Vdc, 0.2 A 24 Vdc, 0.3 A 30 Vdc, 1.0 A 30 Vdc

Sha

pes/

Dim

ensi

ons

M-1 OperationOperation type Vertical, Horizontal

Operating force When specially requested ( N)

M-2 CircuitDiagram

Number of poles 1-pole, 2-pole

Number of contacts 1-contact, 2-contact

Switching mode (timing) Not requested, Non-shorting (NS)

M-3 TravelLock travel 0.8 mm, 1.3 mm, 1.5 mm, 2.4 mm, 2.5 mm, 2.8 mm

Full travel 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, 2.3 mm, 2.5 mm, 3.2 mm, 3.5 mm, 4.5 mm

M-4 TerminalsShape PWB, Forming shape: ( )

Pitch 2.0 mm, 5.0 mm

M-5 LeverTop dimensions Width ( mm) Height ( mm) Length ( mm)

Material UL fi led (Flame retardant: 94HB, 94V-0)

Oth

ers

L-1 Anti-electrostatic When specially requested ( )

L-2 Soldering conditions Temp. ( °C), Time ( s), Specifi c grav i ty of fl ux ( ), Preheat condition ( )

L-3 Special requirements for endurance

L-4 Special requirements for safety

L-5 Other questionnaires

Notes:1. When you specify custom types (custom-made), new tooling and jigs, and/or equipment may be required. It will be necessary to confi rm your

estimates of quantity and development schedule as accurately as possible.2. Please inform us if you designate your own part number.

Oct. 201200


Push Switches

– ES10 –

Application NotesWhen using our Push Switches, please observe thefollowing items (“prohibited items”) and be cautious of the following in order to prevent dangerous accidents andde te ri o ra tion of performance.

1. Prohibited items and notes on mounting1. When soldering (including preheating), do not solder in

the locked condition.2. When soldering using a soldering iron, soldering

conditions vary with the tip shape of the solderingiron, wat tage, and PWB thickness. Thoroughly check the con di tions in advance, including the heatresistance rat ing of the solder.

3. Do not apply a load to terminals when soldering. Care should be taken in this regard because a load mayde te ri o rate electric and mechanical char ac ter is tics.

4. Since the push switches are not sealed, do not wash them.

5. When mounting a push switch to a through-hole type PWB, the infl uence of thermal stress on the switch is greater than that on one-sided PWB. Be sure to check the infl uence as well as the heat re sis tance rating of the solder.

2. Notes on circuit conditions1. To ensure reliability, use switches within the rated range,

as designated in “Product Specifi cations for Information.”2. To avoid malfunction of a set due to bounce generated

by turning the switch ON and OFF, and/or due tochat ter generated by external vibrations, etc., take the following into consideration in design.

Read contact multiple times.(In Case of microcomputer Processing )

Set a delay time.(Recommendation: 3 or more times of reading with the cycle of 3 ms or over)

Prepare a CR integrating circuit.(Recommendation: A time constant of 6 ms or over )

3. When circuits of a two-circuit type are connected in par al lel, switching timing (non-shorting, etc.) described in the spec i fi ca tions is not assured.

3. Prohibited items and notes on mounting and operating conditions

1. In principle, operate the center of the lever.

2. For mounting an operation button:1) Design so that the button is mounted to the cen ter

of the lever.

2) Design a set so that the gap (a) between thecabinet and the button is as small as possible.

(a)=0.1 to 0.3 mm

3) Design so that the load in removal and mounting of the button is within the range of the switch's strength rating of the operational part.

3. If multiple switches are placed side by side, or a switch is placed near another part, the gap be tween the switch and the adjacent switch/part must be at least 1 mm to prevent affect of fl ux and to ensureprop er insulation distance.

4. Design and use so that external stress is not con tin u ous lyapplied to the soldering parts in a set. Ex ter nal stress may cause pattern peeling and solder cracks on a PWB.

5. When mounting a switch, check the ON/OFF po si tion.6. Contact lubricant, which is used in push switches,

may fl ow out to the exterior of the switch due to the struc ture. For design review, suffi ciently check theoperating conditions.

7. Do not pull the switch rod while it is locked. Oth er wise, the self-lock ing func tion may be broken, re sult ing in a lock ing fail ure or mal func tion. Make sure that the switchis re leased es pe cial ly when attaching/de tach ing a but ton to the rod and as sem bling/dis as sem bling the target prod uct. (This ap plies to the self-lock ing switches) Set the strength for de tach ing your but ton (knob) from our switch rod to a max i mum of 10 N in order to min i mize the pos si bil i ty of a break down of the locking func tion. When de sign ing your but ton, re fer to the followingshape and dimensions.Before adopting our switches, check the requirementscarefully.

8. Design to avoid operation with continuous lateralpressure (more than 500 mN on the lever).

9. Do not mount a switch by bending switch terminals. Avoid the following ambient surroundings and other

con di tions because they may affect performance:Under an atmosphere of corrosive gas such as Cl2, H2S, NOx, or SO2

In atmospheres of residual water drops, dew condensation, or adhesive water drops In liquids such as water, salt solution, oil, chem i cals, and organic solvents In direct sunlight In dusty locationsDo not apply a shock to the switch lever during mounting of the switch on the printed circuit board and installation in the target product.

4. Prohibited items and notes on storage con di tionsSince contact characteristics and soldering quality may de te ri o rate due to sulfuration and oxidation of con tacts and terminals, pay heed to the following items.1. For storage and transport of the switches, avoid

unpacking them, and store them at room tem per a ture and room humidity. Use them as soon as pos si ble, gen er al ly within 3 months, or within a max i mum of6 months after de liv ery.

2. Do not store the switches under conditions of hightem per a ture and/or high humidity, or in a location where cor ro sive gas may be generated.

3. If some units remain after unpacking, store them afterapplying adequate moisture-proof and gas-proof treat ment.

5. For use in equipment for which safety re quest ed

Although care is taken to ensure switch quality,vari a tion of contact resistance (increase), shortcircuits, open cir cuits, and temperature rise are some prob lems that might be generated.To de sign a set which places maximum emphasis on safety, review the affect of any single fault of a switch in advance and perform virtually fail-safedesign to ensure max i mum safety by:1. preparing a protective circuit or a protective

device to improve system safety, and2. preparing a redundant circuit to improve sys tem

safe ty so that the single fault of a switch does not cause a dangerous situation.

6. For actual use, be sure to refer to “Product Spec i fi ca tions for Information.”

10.

Reference of Customer's button design

11.

PUSH

Lever Button

(a)

(a)Cabinet

Button

(2.5

)

(3.0)(3.3)(0.6)

Switch rod top

Customer'sbutton

(0.6)

(R1.2)

Oct. 201200


Push Switches

– ES11 –

Common Specifi cations(Standard)

Mechanical

Specifi cations

Lever Strength To withstand 80 N push force applied in operating direction for 15 sec onds

Terminal StrengthTo withstand 5 N push force applied on the end of terminal

in any direction for 1 minute without dam age and/or loosening

Electrical

Specifi cations

Voltage drop0.1 V max. between terminals after 4 or 5 switching operations

under the rated load

Insulation Re sis tanceTerminal to Terminal and Terminal to Frame: 100 M min. (at 500 Vdc)

(Does not apply to the insulation resistance during switching operations)

Dielectric With stand ing

VoltageTerminal to Terminal and Terminal to Frame: 500 Vac for 1 minute

Environmental

Specifi cations

Temperature Range –10 °C to +70 °C (Standard)

Heat Resistance +70 °C for 96 hours (Standard)

Low Temperature

Resistance–10 °C for 96 hours (Standard)

Humidity Resistance 40 °C, 90 % to 95 % RH for 96 hours

Non-loaded LifeNumber of operations :

10000 cycles

Voltage drop : 0.5V max. (ESB32)

Voltage drop : 0.2V max. (ESB20, ESB30, ESB32)

Loaded Life

Type No. of operations Voltage drop

ESB33 30000 cycles 0.5 V max.

ESB30 30000 cycles 0.2 V max

ESE20 30000 cycles 0.2 V max.

Oct. 201200


Push Switches

– ES12 –

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit

Please place an order by an integer multiple of the Quantity/Carton.

Type, Series Part No. PackagingQuantity/Carton

(Export)Min. Q’ty/

Packing Unit

ESB33 Vertical Push Switches ESB33

Polyethylene Bag(Bulk)

2000 pcs.(8000 pcs.)

100 pcs.

Embossed Taping(Reel Pack)

1800 pcs.(7200 pcs.)

300 pcs.

ESB30 Push Switches ESB30 Tray Pack2400 pcs.

(9600 pcs.)480 pcs.

ESE20C/20D MomentaryPush Switches

ESE20 Polyethylene Bag(Bulk)

1200 pcs.(4800 pcs.)

60 pcs.

Oct. 201200

Push Switches/ESB33


– ES13 –

E S B 3 3

Product Code Type Design No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Standard Products

Rating 50 µA 3 Vdc to 0.2 A 14 Vdc (Resistive load)

Travel Lock travel=1.5 mm Full travel=2.3 mm

Mounting Height 6.0 mm

Poles and Throws 2-poles 2-throws

Operating Mode Self-lock, Non-lock

Switching Mode Non-shorting

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit 100 pcs. Polyethylene Bag (Bulk) / 300 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

Quantity/Carton 2000 pcs. Polyethylene Bag (Bulk) / 1800 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

Operating Mode Terminals Packaging Operating Force Part Numbers Lever Color

PP WaveSoldering


3.0 N±1.0 NESB33133

Light YellowNL ESB33134

PP SurfaceMount

Embossed Taping(Reel )

3.0 N±1.0 NESB33535

Light YellowNL ESB33536

Note: PP=Self-lock NL=Non-lock

ESB33 Vertical Push Switches

Type: ESB33 (H=6.0 mm)

Specifi cations

Features Low profi le (H=6.0 mm) 3 N and 5 N operating force availables

Explanation of Part Numbers

Recommended Applications Operation switches for automobiles (heater con trol

switches etc.) Secondary power switches for lower voltage in

consumer electronic equipment and different types of mode switches

Oct. 201200

Push Switches/ESB33


– ES14 –

1.5±

0.3

Lock

trav

el

2.3±

0.5

Full

trav

el

φ1.5±0.1

Circuit diagram

C

C

N.O.N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

PWB mounting hole for referenceTolerance : ±0.05 (t=1.6 mm)

6-2.31.

0 2.5

2.5

φ1.7

6-1.

6

8.7

24-R

0.4

C0.3

7.75

4.92.75

C0.3

1.0

8.6

0.3

12.5

61.

0(6

.5)

12.5

9.85

N.C.

C

N.O.

C

N.O.

N.C.

ENDTOP

24±0

.3

P=20±0.14±0.1

1.75

±0.1

21.5

±0.5

φ1.5+0.12±0.1

25.0φ382.0±2.0

0.2

Carrier tape Cover tapeDrawing direction

Leading portion 400 mm min.

Packed portion(100 mm min.)(160 mm min.)

Non-packed portionNon-packed portion

C0.3

1.5±

0.33.3±0.05

1.0

10.0

0.3

3.5

3.9±

0.2

2.3±

0.5

2.754.9

Lock

trav

el

Full

trav

el

C0.3

7.75

2.5

2.5±

0.1

(6.5

)6.

0

12.5

φ1.5±0.1

PWB mounting hole for reference(Tolerance: ±0.05)

View from terminal side

Circuit diagram

1.0

1.0

1.7

+0.1

0 φ1.2

+0.1

0

1.0

10.0

2.5

2.5

N.C.

C

N.O.N.O.

C

N.C.

8.6

9.85

C

C

N.O.N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

Dimensions in mm (not to scale)

No. 1 No. 2

ESB335362-poles 2-throws

ESB331332-poles 2-throws

Application Notes: Operating force should be applied at the center of the le ver.

Packaging Specifi cations Standard Reel Dimensions in mm (not to scale)

Taping Reel Embossed Carrier Taping

Oct. 201200

Push Switches/ESB30


– ES15 –

E S B 3 0

Product Code TypeA : 1.5 mm 1 : PP (Self-lock)B : 2.5 mm 3 : NL (Non-lock)

Design No.OperatingTravel

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Specifi cations

Rating 50 µA 3 Vdc to 0.2 A 14 Vdc (Resistive load)

Travel Lock Travel=2.5 mm Full Travel=3.5 mm


Poles and Throws 2-poles 2-throws

Operating Mode Self-lock, Non-lock

Switching Mode Non-shorting

Operating Force 2.0 N±1.0 N, 3.5 N±1.5 N

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit 480 pcs. (Tray Pack)

Quantity/Carton 2400 pcs.


ESB30 Push Switches

Type: ESB30 (H=12.5 mm)

Features Reduced inter lock operat ion switching noise

(-10 dB compared to the current value) Simultaneous locking prevention mechanism

Recommended Applications Operation switches for automobiles (air conditioners

switches, Hazard switches, etc.) Secondary power switches for lower voltage in

con sum er electronic equipment and different typesof mode switches

Oct. 201200

Push Switches/ESB30


– ES16 –

Lock travel

Full travel

20.5

PWB mounting hole for reference(Tolerance:±0.05)

View from terminal sideCircuit diagram

(View from terminal side)Forming dimension of terminal(Except for common terminal)

10.9

12.5

0.3

3.5

7.08.9

2-2.50.7

N.O. N.C.

6-φ1.00

C0.4

7.00

2.50

2.50

3.30±0.05

2.5±

0.1

1.0±

0.1

2.5±0.1

PUSH

C1 2

N.O.N.C.

A

5.5 4.5

3.8

C 0.2

1.5

(7.0)

R 1.45

8.1

2.8

1.8

0.8

C detailsA

1.0 2.0

1.0

2.0

F-S Characteristics

Travel (mm)

Op

erat

ing

Forc

e(N

)


OperatingForce

LeverHeight

LockTravel

OperatingMode

Terminal Shape

Straight Formed

2 N±1.0 N 20.5 mm 2.5 mmPP ESB30B132 ESB30B102

NL ESB30B304 ESB30B305

3.5 N±1.5 N 20.5 mm 2.5 mmPP ESB30B103 ESB30B133

NL ESB30B332 ESB30B333

Note: PP=Self-lock, NL=Non-lock

Standard Products

ESB30B132

2-poles 2-throws

Lock Travel Full Travel

2.5 mm 3.5 mm


Oct. 201200

Push Switches/ESE20C/20D


– ES17 –

E S E 2 0

Product Code Type

C : For automotive useD : For consumer products

Design No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Specifi cations

Rating 0.01 A 5 Vdc to 0.1 A 14 Vdc (Resistive load)

Full Travel 2.5 mm


Poles and Throws 1-pole 1-throw

Operating Mode Non-lock

Operating Force 2.0 N±1.0 N, 4.0 N±1.5 N

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit 60 pcs. Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)


ESE20C/20D Momentary Push Switches

Type: ESE20C/ESE20D (H=8.9 mm)


Features User-friendly tactile feedback when operated Long over-travel

Recommended Applications Operation switches for automobiles (switches for heater

controls, overdrive, steering, etc.) Secondary power switches for lower volt age in

consumer electronic equipment and different types of mode switches

Full TravelOperating

ForceLeverHeight

Terminal Shape

Straight Formed

2.5 mm

2.0 N±1.0 N12.5 mm ESE20323 ESE20321

17.5 mm ESE20423 ESE20421

4.0 N±1.5 N12.5 mm ESE20343 ESE20341

17.5 mm ESE20443 ESE20441

Standard Products

···C : For automotive use D : For consumer products

Oct. 201200

Push Switches/ESE20C/20D


– ES18 –

d

ca

b

d

ca

b

Circuit diagram


View from terminal sideO

per

atin

gFo

rce

(N)

Type 4 N

Type 2 N

Travel (mm)F-S Characteristics

Straight Terminal

Full

Trav

elO

NTr

avel

7.8

7.9

6.0

8.0

Push

5.73.3±0.12.5

1.516

.0±0

.515

.0±0

.5

8.9

0.35

3.5

(8.0)9.1±0.5

17.5

5.5

2.5±

0.1

1.0±

0.15

(8.0)

R0.5

(6.0)0.7

1.0 2.0 3.0

1.0

2.0

3.0

4.0

3.6

R1.6

5.7

+0.05

–0

4–φ1

d

ca

b

Circuit diagram

d

ca

b

7.8

7.9

5.7

3.3

11.0

±0.5

10.0

±0.5

8.9

R1.6

(8.0)9.1±0.5

12.5

R0.5

(6.0)0.70.35

5.7

3.5

Full

Trav

elO

NTr

avel


View from terminal side

6.0

8.0

Push

+0.05

–0

4–φ1

Dimensions in mm (not to scale)No. 1

No. 2

ESE204···C : For automotive use

D : For consumer products

1-pole 1-throw

ESE203···C : For automotive use

D : For consumer products

1-pole 1-throw


Oct. 201200

Detector Switches

– ES19 –

Detecto

r Sw

itch es

CONTENTS

Page

Quick Selection Guide .......................................................................................................... ES20

Checklist Before Inquiry ........................................................................................................ ES21

Application Notes................................................................................................................... ES22

Common Specifi cations......................................................................................................... ES23

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit............................................................................................ ES24

9HL Detector Switches (ESE58) .......................................................................................... ES25

1VR Detector Switches (ESE16) ........................................................................................... ES28

1VL Detector Switches (ESE13)............................................................................................ ES30

1HL Detector Switches (ESE18) ........................................................................................... ES33

2HL Detector Switches (ESE31)........................................................................................... ES38

2N Detector Switches (ESE22) ............................................................................................ ES40

5N Detector Switches (ESE11) ............................................................................................. ES43

1HW Detector Switches (ESE23).......................................................................................... ES49

2W Detector Switches (ESE24)............................................................................................ ES51

Oct. 201200

Detector Switches


– ES20 –


Type, Series Appearance Part No. Country of origin Poles & Throws Page

09HL Detector Switches ESE58 Japan 1-1 ES25

1VR Detector Switches ESE16 Japan 1-1 ES28

1VL Detector Switches ESE13 Japan 1-1 ES30

1HL Detector Switches ESE18 Japan 1-1 ES33

2HL Detector Switches ESE31 Japan/China 1-1 ES38

2N Detector Switches ESE22 Japan 1-1 ES40

5N Detector Switches ESE11 Japan/China 1-1 ES43

1HW Detector Switches ESE23 Japan 1-2 ES49

2W Detector Switches ESE24 Japan 1-2 ES51


Oct. 201200

Detector Switches


– ES21 –

Detecto

r Sw

itch es

When specifying Detector Switches, please take advantage of our standard products for better priceing and de liv ery. Please inquire about the following items before ordering.

Checklist Before Inquiry


Com

mon


C-2 Modifi cation

Previous supplier


Purpose

C-3 Application

Equipment

Design standard ofpushing distanceof lever

At switching on (when not pushing) : Pushing distance

(Pushing the point of lever mm) At switching off (when not pushing) : Object of detection is

apart from the point of lever

not apart from the point of lever (Pushing about mm)

Operation frequency

Operate the switches every day. ( times a day)

Almost everytime, the switches are stayed in the released condition.

( times a week / month / year)

Almost everytime, the switches are pushed in the designed position.

( times a week / month / year)


Rating mA V dc mA V ac

Do you give "inrush current" to switches ? : YES NO

Sha

pes/

Dim

ensi

ons

M-1 Operation Operation type Vertical, Horizontal

M-2 Mounting Mountingheight

Vertical PWB to upper suface of housing: ( mm)

Horizontal PWB to center rod: ( mm)

M-3 Terminals PWB, Solder lug

Oth

ers

L-1 Surface MountConnection Manual soldering, Wave soldering, Refl ow Soldering

Packing Unit Polyethylene Bag (Bulk), Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)




The Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law (Japan) was revised on March 1st. 1988. Power switches described here are not under jurisdiction of this law, but comply with its technical requirements.

Notes:1. When selecting Switches, please consider using our standard products for better prices and short delivery times.2. Please inform the following items when ordering.

Oct. 201200

Detector Switches


– ES22 –

2Pre-heating part

230 °C

1s Peak Temperature 6

Tem

per

atur

e(°

C)

Time

1Temperature

rising part 3Temperature

rising part

4Main heating

5Cooling part

1Temperature rising part : Ordinary temperature toPre-heating part: 30 to 60 s.

2Pre-heating part: 150 to 180 °C, 60 to 120 s.3Temperature rising part : Pre-heating part to 230 °C,

20 to 40 s.4Main heating part: Rater to the figure below.5Cooling part: Between 230 to 100 °C, 2 to 4 °C/s6Peak Temperature: 255 °C, 1 s

Pea

kte

mp

erat

ure

(°C

) Specified reflow soldering condition

Time (s) at 200 °C or more(Main heating part)

0 20 40 60

200

210

220

230

Application NotesWhen using our Slide Switches, please observe thefollowing items (“prohibited items”) and be cautious of the following in order to prevent dangerous accidents andde te ri o ra tion of performance.

1. Prohibited items and notes on mounting1. When soldering (including preheating), set the lever to the

release position.2. When soldering using a soldering iron, soldering con di tions

vary with the tip shape of the soldering iron, watt age, and PWB thick ness. Thoroughly check the con di tions inadvance, including the heat re sis tance rat ing of the sol der.

3. Do not apply a load to terminals when soldering. Care should be taken in this regard because a load maydeteriorate electric and mechanical char ac ter is tics.

4. Since the detector switches are not sealed, do not wash them.

5. When mounting a detector switch to a through-hole type PWB, the infl uence of thermal stress on the switch is great er than that on one-sided PWB. Be sure to check the infl uence as well as the heat re sis tance rating of the sol der.

6. For refl ow soldering When performing refl ow soldering using a hot-air oven or

an infrared oven, observe the following con di tions. Since the tem per a ture applied to a switch and its ter mi nals var ieswith the type and size of the PWB and the mounting den si ty of the parts, suf fi cient ly check the conditions in ad vance.

Notes: Measure temperature profi le at the part surface. Do not perform refl ow soldering more than twice.

2. Notes on circuit conditions1. To ensure reliability, use detector switches within the

rat ed range, as designated in “Product Specifi cations forInformation.”

2. To avoid malfunction of a set due to bounce gen er at ed by turning the switch ON and OFF, and/or due to chat ter gen er at ed by external vibrations, etc., take the fol low ing into con sid er ation in design.

Read contact multiple times.(In Case of microcomputer Processing )

Set a delay time.(Recommendation: 3 or more times of reading with the cycle of 3 ms or over)

Prepare a CR integrating circuit.(Recommendation: A time constant of 6 ms or over )

3. Prohibited items and notes on mounting andoperating conditions

1. Design so that the load applied to the lever when a set is used is within the rated range of the switch's le ver strength.

2. If multiple switches are placed side by side, or a switch is placed near another part, the gap be tween the switch and the adjacent switch/part must be at least 1 mm to pre vent af fect of fl ux and to ensure prop er insulation dis tance.

3. Design and use so that external stress is not con tin u ous ly ap plied to the soldering parts in a set in any di rec tion.External stress may cause pattern peel ing and sol der cracks on a PWB.

4. When mounting a switch (mounting to chassis or but ton mount ing), take care so that no foreign mat ter en ters the switch.

5. Contact lubricant, which is used in detector switch es, may fl ow out to the exterior of the switch due to the struc ture. For design review, suffi ciently check theoperating conditions.

6. Avoid the following ambient surroundings and otherconditions because they may affect performance: Under an atmosphere of corrosive gas such as Cl2,

H2S, NOx, or SO2

In atmospheres of residual water drops, dewcondensation, or adhesive water drops

In liquids such as water, salt solution, oil, chem i cals, and organic solvents

In direct sunlight In dusty locations

4. Prohibited items and notes on storage con di tionsSince contact characteristics and soldering quality maydeteriorate due to sulfuration and oxidation of con tacts and ter mi nals, pay heed to the following items.1. For storage and transport of the switches, avoid un pack ing

them, and store them at room tem per a ture and roomhumidity. Use them as soon as pos si ble, gen er al ly with in3 months, or within a max i mum of 6 months after de liv ery.

2. Do not store the switches under conditions of hightemperature and/or high humidity, or in a location where cor ro sive gas may be generated.

3. If some units remain after unpacking, store them afterapplying adequate moisture - proof and gas - prooftreatment.

5. For use in equipment for which safety is re quest ed

Although care is taken to ensure switch quality,variation of contact resistance (increase), shortcircuits, open circuits, and temperature rise are some prob lems that might be generated.To de sign a set which places maximum emphasis on safe ty, review the affect of any single fault of a switch in advance and perform virtually fail-safe de sign toen sure max i mum safety by:1. preparing a protective circuit or a protective

device to improve system safety, and2. preparing a redundant circuit to improve sys tem



Oct. 201200

Detector Switches


– ES23 –

Detecto

r Sw

itch es

Common Specifi cations (Standard)

MechanicalSpecifi cations

Lever StrengthTo withstand 10 N push force applied in operating direction for 15 seconds (ESE11, 22, 24, 31)To withstand 2 N push force applied in operating direction for 15 seconds (ESE13, 16, 18, 23)To withstand 1 N push force applied in operating direction for 15 seconds (ESE58)

Terminal StrengthTo withstand 3 N push force applied on the end of

terminal in any direction for 1 minute[0.5 N : ESE13, 16, 18, 23, 58]

ElectricalSpecifi cations

Contact Resistance 500 m max.

Insulation ResistanceTerminal to Terminal and Terminal to Outer Metal Part:

100 M min. (at 100 Vdc)

Dielectric With stand ingVoltage

Terminal to Terminal and Terminal to Outer Metal Part:100 Vac for 1 minute

EnvironmentalSpecifi cations

OperatingTemperature Range

−10 °C to +70 °C (ESE11, 22, 24, 31) −10 °C to +60 °C (ESE13, 16, 18, 23, 58)

Heat Resistance +80 °C for 96 hours (ESE11, 22, 24) +85 °C for 96 hours (ESE31) +70 °C for 96 hours (ESE13, 16, 18, 23, 58)

Low TemperatureResistance

−25 °C for 96 hours −40 °C for 96 hours (ESE31)

Humidity Resistance 40 °C, 90 % to 95 % RH for 96 hours 60 °C, 90 % to 95 % RH for 96 hours (ESE31)

Non-loaded LifeNumber of operations 50000 cy cles

Contact resistance : 1 max. (ESE11, 13, 24)Contact resistance : 3 max. (ESE22, 31)Voltage drop : 1.5 V max. (ESE16, 18, 58)Voltage drop : 1.0 V max. (ESE23)

Loaded LifeNumber of operations 50000 cy cles

Contact resistance : 1 max. (ESE11, 13, 24)Contact resistance : 3 max. (ESE22, 31)Voltage drop : 1.5 V max. (ESE16, 18, 58)Voltage drop : 1.0 V max. (ESE23)

Oct. 201200

Detector Switches


– ES24 –

Type, Series Part No. Packaging Quantity/Carton(Export)

Min. Q’ty/Packing Unit

09HL Detector SwitchesType: ESE58 ESE58 Embossed Taping

(Reel Pack)30000 pcs.

(120000 pcs.) 5000 pcs.

1VR Detector SwitchesType: ESE16 ESE16 Embossed Taping


(96000 pcs.) 4000 pcs.

1VL Detector SwitchesType: ESE13

ESE13VEmbossed Taping

(Reel Pack)

18000 pcs.(72000 pcs.) 3000 pcs.

ESE13H 30000 pcs.(120000 pcs.) 5000 pcs.



(120000 pcs.) 5000 pcs.



(60000 pcs.) 2500 pcs.

2N Detector SwitchesType: ESE22

ESE22MV21T


6000 pcs.(24000 pcs.) 1000 pcs.

ESE22MH22ESE22MH24

24000 pcs.(96000 pcs.) 4000 pcs.

ESE22MH27TESE22MH28TESE22MH52ESE22MH54

18000 pcs.(72000 pcs.) 3000 pcs.

ESE22MH51ESE22MH53ESE22MH57ESE22MH58ESE22MV21ESE22MH21ESE22MH23ESE22MH27ESE22MH28


10000 pcs.(40000 pcs.) 500 pcs.

5N Detector SwitchesType: ESE11

ESE11SVESE11MVESE11SHESE11MHESE11HSESE11SF


10000 pcs.(40000 pcs.) 200 pcs.

ESE11MV2 8000 pcs 200 pcs.

ESE11MVT(Excluding : ESE11MV2) Embossed Taping

(Reel Pack)

4800 pcs.(19200 pcs.) 800 pcs.

ESE11MHT 9000 pcs.(36000 pcs.) 1500 pcs.

1HW Detector SwitchesType: ESE23 ESE 23 Embossed Taping

(Reel Pack)24000 pcs.(96000 pcs.) 4000 pcs.

2 W Detector SwitchesType: ESE24

ESE24SHESE24SVESE24MHESE24MV


10000 pcs.(50000 pcs.) 200 pcs.

ESE24SH1ESE24SH6ESE24SH7ESE24SV2ESE24SV8

8000 pcs.(40000 pcs.) 160 pcs.

ESE24MHTEmbossed Taping

(Reel Pack)

6000 pcs.(24000 pcs.) 1000 pcs.

ESE24MVT 3000 pcs.(12000 pcs.) 500 pcs.

Minimum Quantity/Packing UnitPlease place an or der by an in te ger multiple of the Quantity/Car ton.

Oct. 201200

Detector Switches/ESE58


– ES25 –

1

E

2

S

3

E

4 5 6 7 8 9

Product Code Design No

85

6thLR

Left-side operation typeRight-side operation type

Type

09HL Detector Switches

Type: ESE58

Features Thin body: 0.9 mm. Circuit type: Normally-open and normally-closed

types are available. Lineup with variations in right-left operations.

Recommended Ap pli ca tions Detection of media in portable electronic equipment

(Mobile phones/Digital still cameras/DVCs, etc.)


Specifi cations

Rating 50 µA 3 Vdc to 10 mA 5 Vdc (Resistive load)

Contact Resistance 500 m max. (Initial)

Insulation Resistance 100 M min. (100 Vdc)

Dielectric Withstanding Voltage 100 Vac for 1 minute

Operating Force 300 mN max.



Full Travel (Pushing distance) With boss : 1.5 mm (1.5 mm) Without boss : 1.25 mm (1.5 mm)

Operating Life 50000 cycles min.

Temperature Range –10 °C to +60 °C

Heat Resistance +70 °C for 96 hours

Low Temperature Resistance –25 °C for 96 hours

Humidity Resistance +40 °C 90 % to 95 % RH for 96 hours

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit 5000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)


Oct. 201200



– ES26 –

0.48

R0.14

R2.45

0.5

0.2

0.9±0.1

0.390.77

φ0.6±0.051.6±0.10.

4C0

.1

Pivot center

On

pos

ition

On position

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt

Full

stro

kepo

sitio

n

2.55

±0.2

0.3

4.52.8

0.8

0.25

0.7

3.0

3.5

1.6

2.0

1.5

(1)

(0.64)

0.242.

9

PWB mounting holefor reference

(Pitch tolerance: ±0.05)2–

φ0.7

0.48

R0.14

R2.45

0.5

0.2

0.9±0.1

0.390.77

Pivot center

On

pos

ition

On position

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt

Full

stro

kepo

sitio

n

2.3

1.1 1.

25

4.52.8

0.7

3.0

3.5

1.75

1.25

(0.7

5)

(0.64)

0.24

2.65


(Pitch tolerance: ±0.05)

R0.14

R2.45

0.5

0.2

Pivot center0.390.77

Off

pos

ition

3.0

3.5±0.2

φ0.6±0.051.6±0.1

0.4

0.9

2–φ0

.7

4.52.8

1.6

0.4

0.44 Off position

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt

1.5 2.0

Full

stro

kepo

sitio

n

(1)

(0.64)

C0.

10.

30.

45

0.24

2.9

2.6±

0.2

0.9±0.1



0.8

0.6

0.45

0.9

R0.14

R2.45

0.5

0.2

Pivot center0.390.77

Off

pos

ition

3.0

3.50.4 0.8

0.6

1.05

1.35

4.52.8

0.44 Off positionO

per

atio

np

oint

1.05

1.55

Full

stro

kepo

sitio

n

(0.5

5)

(0.64)

0.3

1.35

0.24

2.45

2.15±

0.2

0.9±0.1



0.48

R0.1

4

R2.45

0.5

0.2

0.9±0.1

0.390.77

φ0.6±0.051.6±0.10.

4C0

.1

Pivot center

On

pos

ition

On position

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt

Full

stro

kepo

sitio

n

2.55

±0.2

0.3

4.52.8

0.8

3.5

1.6

2.0

1.5

0.24

2.9



2–φ0

.7

0.25

0.7

3.0

(1)

(0.64)

0.48

R0.1

4

R2.45

0.5

0.2

0.9±0.1

0.390.77

Pivot center

On

pos

ition

On position

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt

Full

stro

kepo

sitio

n

2.3±

0.2

3.5

1.75

1.25

0.24

2.650.

73.

0

(0.75

)

(0.64)

1.1 1.

25

4.52.8



No. 1

with BossESE58L11B

Nomal closed typeESE58L61 J-bent ter mi nals1-pole 1-throw

Nomal open typeESE58L11 J-bent terminals1-pole 1-throw

Nomal open typeESE58R11 J-bent terminals1-pole 1-throw

No. 2

with BossESE58L61B

No. 3

with BossESE58R11B


without BossESE58L11A

without BossESE58L61A

without BossESE58R11A

Oct. 201200



– ES27 –

Packed portion Cover tape

Carrier tape

END TOPDrawing direction

Pilot holes Leading portion 400 mm min.

Non-packed portion(160 mm min.)


16.0

±0.3

1.75

±0.1

7.5±

0.1

φ1.5 +0.10

P=8.0±0.14.0±0.12.0±0.1

13.5

φ380.0±2.0 16.4

CommonTerminal

CommonTerminal C 1C 1

CommonTerminal

CommonTerminalCC 1 1

0.5

0.2

0.390.77

Off

pos

ition

φ0.6±0.051.6±0.1

2–φ0

.7

4.52.8

1.6

0.4

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt1.

5 2.0

Full

stro

kepo

sitio

n

C0.

1

2.9

2.6±

0.2

0.9±0.1



Pivot center

R0.14

R2.45

3.5

0.44

(0.64)

0.24Off position

0.8

0.6

0.45

0.9

3.0

0.45

0.4

0.9

(1)

0.3

0.5

0.2

0.390.77

Off

pos

ition

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt1.0

51.

55Fu

llst

roke

pos

ition

2.45

2.15±

0.2

0.9±0.1



3.0

Pivot center

R0.14

R2.45

3.0

3.5

0.4

1.35

0.44

(0.5

5)

(0.64)

0.3

0.24Off position

0.8

0.6

1.05

1.35

4.52.8

No. 4

with BossESE58R61B

Nomal closed typeESE58R61 J-bent terminals1-pole 1-throw


Circuit Diagram

Normal open type1-pole 1-throw (N . O)Type ESE58L Type ESE58R

Normal closed type1-pole 1-throw (N . C)Type ESE58L Type ESE58R



without BossESE58R61A

Oct. 201200



– ES28 –

1

E

2

S

3

E

4 5 6 7 8 9


61

Type

Specifi cations



Insulation Resistance 10 M max. (100 Vdc)





Full Travel (Pushing distance) 1.5 mm (1.0 mm)








1VR Detector Switches

Type: ESE16

Features External Dimensions: 2.2 mm3.35 mm (Height:1.5 mm) Light operating force: 250 mN or less Auto mounting supported: Can be mounted by standard

nozzles

Recommended Applications Detection of media in portable electronic equipment (Mobile phones / Digital still cameras / Camcorders)


Oct. 201200



– ES29 –

Separateterminal

Separateterminal

Dummyterminal

Dummyterminal43

1 2

43

21

Full stroke position

Vertical directionON starting position

2.65

max

.1.

5 1.5 2.

2 2.5

2.2

3.351.4

0.45

PWB land pattern reference(Pitch tolerance: ±0.05)

1.6

3.35

0.52.3

φ380.0±2.0 16.4

1.75

±0.1

7.5±

0.1 P=8.0±0.1

4.0±0.1

2.0±0.1

16.0

φ1.5 +0.1–0

Packed portionNon-packed portion

(100 mm min.)Non-packed portion

(160 mm min.) Cover tape

Carrier tape


Pilot holes

Leading portion 400 mm min

Circuit Diagram




ESE161-pole 1-throw

1-pole 1-throw (N.O)


Oct. 201200



– ES30 –

1

E

2

S

3

E

4 5 6 7 8 9


31

6thHV

From under to top type

From top to under type

Type

Without BossWith BossWithout BossWith Boss

Positioning

J-bent TypeJ-bent Type

Straight TypeStraight Type

Terminal Type9thABCD

Specifi cations








Full Travel (Pushing distance)Type V : 2.15 mm (2.15 mm)Type H : 3.05 mm (2.15 mm)






Minimum Quantity/Packing UnitESE13H 5000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

ESE13V 3000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

Quantity/CartonESE13H 30000 pcs.

ESE13V 18000 pcs.

1VL Detector Switches

Type: ESE13

Features Thin type : Height=1.2 mm Highly reliable contact SMD type (Embossed taping, Refl ow soldering)


Recommended Applications Detection of media in portable electronic equipment (Mobile phones / Digital still cameras / Camcorders)

Oct. 201200



– ES31 –

Action direction

Release position Separateterminal

Commonterminal

Separateterminal

Commonterminal

ON angular dimension

Pivot center

ON startposition

(1)

D

C

B

A

1.2

4.2

3.6

1.95

1.14±0.31.55±0.35

(0.58)

3.05

±0.3

1.2±

0.2

2.65

±0.3

0.52±0.05

3.0

0.51.0

0.4

(15˚)(60˚)

0.2 max.

0.9

0.5

0.6

0.55

0.65

0.45

0.5 -0.10φ0.6

4.2

0.7

4.6

2.2

AC

BD3.0 0.55

4.3

1.02.00.7

2-φ0.8 -0+0.1

Action direction

Release position

Separateterminal

Commonterminal

Pivot center

Separateterminal

Commonterminal

ON angular dimensionON startposition

(1)

A

B

C

D

4.2

3.6

1.95

1.2

1.14±0.31.55±0.35

3.05

±0.3

2.65

±0.3

1.2±

0.2

0.5

(0.58)

1.00.55

2±0.053.0

0.50.5 0.2 max.

0.9

0.6

(15˚)

(60˚)

0.4

0.65

0.45

0.5

0.5-0.10φ0.6

D

C

B

A

0.7

2.2

3.0 0.55

4.3

2-φ0.8 -0+0.11.02.0

0.7

D

C

B

A

1.2

4.2

3.6

2.3

0.2 max.

0.77±0.32.14±0.35

(15°)

(60°)0.

4

0.55

(0.3

8)

1.0

(0.58)

3.0

0.50.5

2±0.05

1.2±

0.2

1.6±

0.3

3.05

±0.3

0–0.1φ0.6

0.450.

65

0.650.6

0.5 0.5

A

B

C

D

2.0 1.0

2.2

0.7 0.7

4.3

0.553.0

+0.10

2-φ0.8

Full travel Separateterminal

Commonterminal

Separateterminal

Commonterminal

ON angulardimension

Pivot center

ON startposition

No. 1

With boss ESE13V01B

Without boss ESE13V01A

ESE13V Straight ter mi nals1-pole 1-throw

ESE13V J-bent terminals1-pole 1-throw

ESE13H J-bent terminals1-pole 1-throw

No. 2

With boss ESE13V01D

Without boss ESE13V01C

No. 3

With boss ESE13H01B

Without boss ESE13H01A


PWB mounting hole for reference(Pitch tolerance: ±0.05)



Oct. 201200



– ES32 –

Full travel

Separateterminal

Commonterminal

Separateterminal

Commonterminal

Pivot center

ON startposition

ON angulardimension

0.77±0.3(2.14±0.35)

3.05

±0.3

1.6±

0.3

1.2±0

.2

0.5

(0.3

8)

2±0.05

0.5

0.4

0.55

3.01.0

(0.58)

0.2 max.

(15˚)

(60˚)

0.6

0.7 0.7

2.0

4.6

2.2

3 0.55

4.3

2-φ0

.8+0.1

-0

3.6

4.2

1.2

2.3

0.6

0.65

A

B

C

D

D

C

B

A

-0.10φ0.6

0.5

0.65

φ380.0±2.0 16.4

Packed portionNon-packed portion


(160 mm min.) Cover tape

Carrier tape


Pilot holesLeading portion 400 mm min

16.0

±0.3

1.75

±0.1

7.5±

0.1

P=8.0±0.14.0±0.12.0±0.1

φ1.5 +0.10

13.5

Commonterminal C

Circuit Diagram


No. 4

With boss ESE13H01D

Without boss ESE13H01C



ESE13H Straight terminals1-pole 1-throw



Oct. 201200



– ES33 –

1

E

2

S

3

E

4 5 6 7 8 9


81

6thLR


Type


Type: ESE18

Features Thin body: 1.2 mm Circuit type: Normally-open and normally-closed

types are available. Travel: Standard stroke type: 1.5 mm

Long stroke type: 2.15 mm Surface mounted type: Packed with embossed tape.

Supports refl ow soldering.


(Mobile phones/CD-ROM/DVD players, Digital still cameras)


Specifi cations








Full Travel (Pushing distance) · Standard stroke type · Long stroke type With boss : 1.4 mm (1.5 mm) With boss : 1.4 mm (2.15 mm) Without boss : 2.1 mm (1.5 mm) Without boss : 2.1 mm (2.15 mm)








Oct. 201200



– ES34 –

(52.

4°)

(14.7°)

0.25

1.0

0.75

0.7

0.4

3.4 2.0±

0.1

φ0.6

±0.0

5

(1.2)

1.2±0.2

0.25

0.25

0.5

0.5

0.65

4.02.7

0.5

0.5

1.0

(3.2)

0.7

1.4(2.0

)3.1

3.55

0.54

R0.3

3.2

3.83.

0

1.2

3.6

0.25

1.15

5.4

1.8

Full

stro

kep

ositi

on

(Piv

otce

nter

)

Pivot center

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt

Cas

ece

nter

ON start positionOFF start position

ON

star

tpos

ition

OFF

star

tpos

ition

ON angular terminalOFF angular terminal

3.61.8

4.13.

0

1.2

0.25

1.15

3.25.4

1.2±0.20.40.25

3.4 2.0±

0.1

φ0.6

±0.0

5

1.0(1.2)

2.9

0.5

0.5

2.6

(2.0

)

1.4

0.7

0.70.

75

0.52.74.0

0.5

0.54

0.65

R0.

3

2.6 max.(14.7˚)

(52.

4˚)

1.0

Full

stro

kep

ositi

on

(Piv

otce

nter

)

Pivot center

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt

Dummy terminal

Cas

ece

nter


ON

star

tpos

ition

OFF

star

tpos

ition


Act

ion

dire

ct

ion

(1.2)1.0

0.25

(52.

4°)

(14.7°)

0.65

R0.

3

2.6 max.

0.54

0.250.4

0.5

0.52.74.0

1.2±0.2

φ0.6

±0.0

5

3.4

0.5

2.9

2.6

(2)

1.4

1.0

0.75

0.70.

7

0.5

0.25

2.0±

0.1

5.43.2

1.83.6

0.25

1.15

3.0

1.2

3.8

Operation pointFull stroke position



Pivot center

Pivot center


Dummy terminal

Case center

Act

ion

dire

ction

Long stroke typeESE18L J-bent terminals1-pole 1-throwNormal open

with BossESE18L12B

Normal openwithout BossESE18L12A

Normal closedwith BossESE18L62B

Normal closedwithout BossESE18L62A

No. 1

Normal openwith BossESE18L11B

Normal openwithout BossESE18L11A

Normal closedwith BossESE18L61B

Normal closedwithout BossESE18L61A

Standard stroke typeESE18L Straight ter mi nals1-pole 1-throw

Standard stroke typeESE18L J-bent terminals1-pole 1-throw

No. 2

Normal openwith BossESE18L11D

Normal openwithout BossESE18L11C

Normal closedwith BossESE18L61D

Normal closedwithout BossESE18L61C

No. 3





Oct. 201200



– ES35 –

Actiondirection

(1.2)1.0

φ0.6

±0.0

5

2.9

2.0±

0.1

3.4

0.40.25

1.2±0.2

2.6

1.4(2.0

)

1.0

0.75

0.7

0.5

0.7

0.5

0.52.74.0

0.5

Full

stro

kep

ositi

on

(Piv

otce

nter

)

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt

0.54

R0.3

0.65

2.6 max.

Pivot center

Dummy terminal

Cas

ece

nter

(14.7 ˚) (52.4˚)

3.25.4

1.2

3.61.8

4.1

3.0

0.25

1.15

ON

star

tpos

ition

OFF

star

tpos

ition



Full

stro

kep

ositi

on

(Piv

otce

nter

)

Pivot center

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt

Cas

ece

nter


ON

star

tpos

ition

OFF

star

tpos

ition


(52.

4°)

(14.7°)

0.25

1.0

0.75

0.7

0.4

3.4 2.

0±0.

1φ0

.6±0

.05

(1.2)

1.2±0.2

0.5

0.65

4.02.7

0.5

1.0

(3.2)

0.7

1.4

(2.0

)3.1

3.55

0.54R0.3

3.2

4.13.

0

1.2

3.6

0.25

1.15

5.4

1.8

0.5

(1.2)

1.0

0.25

(52.4°)

(14.7°)0.65R

0.3

2.6 max.

5.43.2

1.83.6

0.25

1.15

3.0

1.2

3.8

0.54

0.250.4

0.5

0.52.74.0

1.2±0.2

φ0.6

±0.0

5

3.4

0.5

2.9

2.6

(2)

1.4

1.0

0.75

0.7

0.7

0.5

0.25

2.0±

0.1

Operation point


Pivot center

Pivot centerDummy terminal

Case center



Actiondirection

No. 4

Normal openwith BossESE18R11D

Normal openwithout BossESE18R11C

Normal closedwith BossESE18R61D

Normal closedwithout BossESE18R61C

Standard stroke typeESE18R Straight terminals1-pole 1-throw

Long stroke typeESE18L Straight ter mi nals1-pole 1-throw

No. 5

No. 6

Normal openwith BossESE18L12D

Normal openwithout BossESE18L12C

Normal closedwith BossESE18L62D

Normal closedwithout BossESE18L62C





Standard stroke typeESE18R J-bent terminals1-pole 1-throwNormal open

with BossESE18R11B

Normal openwithout BossESE18R11A

Normal closedwith BossESE18R61B

Normal closedwithout BossESE18R61A

Oct. 201200



– ES36 –

2.74.0

0.65φ0

.6±0

.05

2.0±

0.1

0.40.25

(1.2)

1.2± 0.2

1.03.25.4

1.83.6

0.5

1.2

0.25

1.15

3.0

3.8

0.50.25

3.4

0.25

0.5

(3.2)

0.5

0.70.

750.

7

1.01.4

(2.0

)3.1

0.54

R0.3

3.55

(14.7 °)

(52.4°)

Operation point


Pivot center

Pivot center Dummy terminal

Case center



2.74.0

0.65

φ0.6

±0.0

52.

0±0.

13.

4

0.40.25

(1.2)

1.2±0.2

1.03.25.4

1.83.6

0.5

1.2

0.25

1.15

3.0

0.5

0.5 4.

1

(3.2)

0.5

0.70.

750.

7

1.01.4

(2.0

)3.1

0.54

R0.3

3.55

(14.7 °)

(52.4°)

Full

stro

kep

ositi

on

(Piv

otce

nter

)

Pivot center

Op

erat

ion

poi

nt

Cas

ece

nter


ON

star

tpos

ition

OFF

star

tpos

ition


Dummy terminal

C1C 1

Dummy Dummy

Commonterminal

Dummy Dummy

Commonterminal

C1C 1

Dummy Dummy

Commonterminal

Dummy Dummy

Commonterminal

Circuit Diagram


No. 7

Normal openwith BossESE18R12B

Normal openwithout BossESE18R12A

Normal closedwith BossESE18R62B

Normal closedwithout BossESE18R62A

Long stroke typeESE18R Straight ter mi nals1-pole 1-throw

Long stroke typeESE18R J-bent terminals1-pole 1-throw

No. 8

Normal openwith BossESE18R12D

Normal openwithout BossESE18R12C

Normal closedwith BossESE18R62D

Normal closedwithout BossESE18R62C



Normal open type1-pole 1-throw (N . O)Type ESE18L Type ESE18R

Normal closed type1-pole 1-throw (N . C)Type ESE18L Type ESE18R

Oct. 201200



– ES37 –


Carrier tape


Pilot holesLeading portion 400 mm min.



16.0

±0.3

1.75

±0.1

7.5±

0.1

P=8.0±0.14.0±0.12.0±0.1

φ1.5 +0.10

13.5

φ380.0±2.0 16.4



Standard stroke typeLong stroke type

Oct. 201200



– ES38 –

1

E

2

S

3

E

4 5 6 7 8 9


13

6thLR


Type


Type: ESE31

Features Increased the mounting strength Mounting strength: 80 N Decreased the profi le of the switch body Height: 1.7 mm Increased the contact reliability and lifespan.

Lifespan: 100,000 operations or more



Specifi cations








Full Travel(Pushing distance)

3.2 mm (2.15 mm)








Oct. 201200



– ES39 –

PWB mounting hole for reference

HorizontalON positionmeasuringposition


Verti

cal

dire

ctio

n

Horizontaldirection

1.11.5

1.6

1.7

0.5

5.5

5.9

2-φ1±0.05

0.5±

0.05

3.2

2.3

1.2

1.05 (2

.5)

1.45

5.45

±0.1

0.26±0.25

2.5±

0.1

5.2

2.5

0.6

(1)

Operation point

2.8

0.42

1.21 13.5

7.45

+0.05–0

1.2

1.6

1.76.1

6.0

5.69.0

1.1

+0.05–0φ1.1

φ1.3

2.5

0.14

(8.6

5)5.

44.

35

R3.8

5.75

1.1

2-C0.2

Horizontal ON positionMeasuring position

φ380.0±2.0 16.4


Carrier tape




Non-packedportion

(100 mm min.)

16.0

±0.3

1.75

±0.1

7.5±

0.1

P=12.0±0.1φ1.5 +0.10

13.5

4.0±0.12.0±0.1

Common terminal

Common terminal

Common terminal

C 1

C C Common terminal Common terminal

Common terminalC1

C C




Verti

cald

irect

ion

Horizontaldirection

Horizontal ON positionOperation point1.1

1.5

1.6

1.7

0.5

5.52-C0.2

5.9

2-φ1±0.05

0.5±

0.05

3.2

2.3

1.2

1.05(2

.5)

1.45

5.45

±0.1

0.26±0.25

2.5±

0.1

5.2

2.5

0.6

(1)

Measuring position2.

80.42

1.2 113.57.45

+0.05–0

1.2

1.6

1.76.1

6.0

5.69.0

1.1

+0.05–0φ1.1

φ1.3

2.5

0.14

(8.6

5)5.

44.

35

R3.8R0.2

5.751.

1

Circuit Diagram



No. 1 ESE31L11T No. 2 ESE31R11T

1-pole 1-throw 1-pole 1-throw

ESE31R11T


1-pole 1-throw (N . O)

ESE31L11T

Oct. 201200



– ES40 –

2N Detector Switches

Type: ESE22

Features Can be operated with different actuation angles (horizontally and vertically) Refl ow soldering Light operating force


Specifi cations






Mounting Height · Type MV 4.1 mm · Type MH 2.1 mm · Type MH with Frame 2.85 mm


Full Travel (Pushing distance) · Type MV 4.25 mm(2.05 mm) · Type MH 1.2 mm(2.0 mm) · Type MH with Frame 0.6 mm(2.0 mm)







500 pcs. Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)

· Type MV 1000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack) · Type MH with Frame 3000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack) · Type MH 4000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

Quantity/Carton

10000 pcs. Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)

· Type MV 6000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack) · Type MH with Frame 18000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack) · Type MH 24000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

Recommended Applications Detection of media in portable electronic equipment

E

1

S

2

E

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

2 2

Product Code Type Design No.Style

Oct. 201200



– ES41 –


No. 4 1-pole 1-throw

Part Numbers Packaging Part Numbers Packaging

ESE22MV21 Polyethylene Bag (Bulk) ESE22MH51 Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)

ESE22MV21T Embossed Taping (Reel Pack) ESE22MH52 Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)


Type

Part Numbers H : boss Packaging

Type

Part Numbers H : boss PackagingESE22MH21 0.5 Polyethylene Bag (Bulk) ESE22MH23 0.5 Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)ESE22MH27 1.0 Polyethylene Bag (Bulk) ESE22MH28 1.0 Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)ESE22MH22 0.5 Embossed Taping (Reel Pack) ESE22MH24 0.5 Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)ESE22MH27T 1.0 Embossed Taping (Reel Pack) ESE22MH28T 1.0 Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

No. 1 1-pole 1-throw No. 2 1-pole 1-throw

With Frame Type

0.35 max.

0.1mi

n.

0.12

6.15

1.3

2.1

0.6

–0.2

+0.

32.

63.

95

3.51

0.6

0.18±0.25

1.4

1.2

2.2φ0.7

1.21.2

0.28

0.08

(2.1

)

0.51

0.98

R4.55

R0.4

5

2.85 0.5

0.6

4.75

1.5

C0.2

21±0.1

54

3

1

2

5.95

0.2 0.23.54.8


Horizontal ON positionmeasuring point


Part APart A

Horizontal ON startingposition

5.95

Center of on start positionin case of horizontal operation


(Scale:1/2)

3.5

3.5

2-φ0.7

+0.05

(Hole

)00.

5

1.6

1.6

2.0

1.4

1.6 1.62.

02.

95

1.4

5.71.0

1.0

3.44.4

R0.3

R0.1 R4.5

4.255.

15.85

(3.1

)

±0.3

0-0.1

±0.1

1.93.

8 ±0.1

(φ0.7)

C0.2

5.9

±0.3

6.3

±0.3

4.1

1.95

φ1.20-0.1

(4.0)

φ1.0

0.45

0.13

max

.

±0.11.0

1.0

1.50.88

Pushable height

PWB mounting hole for reference(View from A direction, SCL=1/2)

Horizontal ON positionmeasuring position

ON startingposition

ON startingposition

0.2

A

1.4

1.5

1.5

2.4

4.0

Operatingdirection

φ1.1 +0.10

φ1.3 +0.101.4

3.5

ON startingposition


Full strokeposition

Boss centerON starting position standard


1.01.45

1.9

H

1.0 1.0 1.01.43.5

2.1 max.

(8.6

5)2.

52.

32.

71.

2 (φ0.7)

6.55.

03.

953.

22.

81.

5

2-φ1.0

0±0.05

0.05

R4.5

0.880.262.2

5.7

(The hole for flux prevention)2.2

1.75.3


6.0 3.

5

2.5±

0.1

φ1.1 +0.05hole0

φ1.1 hole

ON startingposition


Full strokeposition

Boss centerON starting position standard


1.0 1.0 1.01.43.5

1.9

H

5.70.88

0.262.2

R4.5

(φ0.7

)

2-φ1.0

0±0.05

0.05

1.2 2.

32.

52.

7

6.5 5.

03.

953.

22.

8

(8.6

5)2.1 max.

1.01.45

1.5

2.2

1.75.3

6.0 3.

5

2.5±

0.1

2φ1.1 +0.05hole0 φ1.1 hole

(The hole fluxprevention)


Sep. 201000



– ES42 –

Circuit Diagram



Solder lug TypeWith Frame Type

Solder lug Type

Part Numbers Packaging Part Numbers Packaging

ESE22MH53 Polyethylene Bag (Bulk) ESE22MH57 Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)

ESE22MH54 Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

Part Numbers Packaging

ESE22MH58 Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)


No. 5 1-pole 1-throwNo. 6 1-pole 1-throw



ESE22MH

ESE22MV

16.4φ380.0±2.0

Carrier tape

Cover tape

Insert direction of switch

Carrier tapeTOPEND Drawing direction


Cover tapePacked portionNon-packed portion


(160 mm min.)

16.0

±0.3

1.75

±0.1

7.5±

0.1

P=8.0±0.14.0±0.12.0±0.1

φ1.5 +0.10

13.5

16.0

±0.3

1.75

±0.1

7.5

P=12.0±0.1

4.0±0.12.0±0.1

φ1.5 +0.10

13.5

7.9 0.410.0

Drawing directionPilot holes


Packed portion (100 mm min.)(160 mm min.)Non-packed portionNon-packed portion

TOPEND

Horizontal operationON starting position




Part A Part A

Part A

0.1

min

.

Part APart A

4.15

3.35

0.08

0.280.18±0.25

5.95

0.98

4.83.5 0.20.2

R0.45

6.15

3.5 1.61.6

2-φ1

0.1

(2.1

)

φ0.72.2

1.3

1.2 1.2

1.40.

6

3.95

–0.2

+0.

32.

6

0.6

2.1

1.2

R4.55

0.5

1±0.12

C0.2

2

0.6

0.52.85

1

23

4

5

Commonterminal

Commonterminal

C

C

Part A

6.15

2.1

0.6

0.18±0.25

1.4 2.2

1.21.2

0.28

0.08

0.98

R4.55

R0.45

3.5 1.61.6

φ0.7

0.1

1.3

–0.2

+0.

32.

63.

951.2

(2.1

)0.

6

54

1

32

0.5

2.85 0.5

0.6

C0.2

21±0.1

2

5.95

0.2 0.23.54.8

0.1m

in.

2-φ1 4.153.

35

Horizontal on positionmeasuring point

Horizontal on startingposition



Part APart A

Part A Part A

Horizontal ON startingposition




Part A Part A

0.1mi

n.

0.35 max.

5.954.83.5 0.20.2

(2.1

)

0.08

0.28

φ0.72.2

1.3

1.2 1.2

1.4

0.18±0.25

0.6

3.95

–0.2

+0.

32.

6

0.6

2.1

6.15

1.2

0.98

R4.55

0.5

1±0.12

C0.2

2

1.5

0.1

0.6

0.52.85

1

2

3

45

4.75

1 13.5

R0.45

Oct. 201200



– ES43 –

E

1

S

2

E

3

1

4

1

5 6 7 8 9

5N Detector Switches

Type:ESE11


Features Wide range of customizable fea tures including operational directions Light operating force Wide available range for refl ow soldering


Specifi cations





Operating Force 350 mN max. (Full Travel)

Mounting Height

· Type SV 4.9 mm · Type MV 4.9 mm (MV2, 7 : 5.4 mm) · Type SH 5.25 mm · Type MH 4.25 mm · Type HS, SF 3.6 mm


Full Travel (Pushing distance)

· Type SV 6.1 mm (2.4 mm) · Type MV 6.1 mm (2.4 mm) · Type SH 3.0 mm (2.4 mm) · Type MH 1.7 mm (2.4 mm) · Type HS, SF 6.3 mm (2.4 mm)






Oct. 201200



– ES44 –

5.2

6.4

2.2

3.0

2.45

4.9 8.

5(2

.7)

1.0

(3.3)

φ1.2–0.1

0.1

7.75

6.1

1.27

ON startingposition

Lever center

φ1.25 +0.05

0

A

Full travel1.00.8

1.0

1.00.952.3

PWB mounting hole for referenceView from A

0

2.3(2.45)

0.95

4–φ1.10 +0.050

3.3

5.26.4

2.2

3.0

1.651.0

4.9

1.0

8.5±

0.2

1.0

1.75 φ1.20

–0.1

7.75

6.1

1.27ON startingposition

1.65±0.1

0.8

Full travel

1.51.751.0

1.41.85

1.4

1.4

2.0

2.0

1.4

3.353.25

2-φ1.3 Hole

A




200 pcs.Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)

ESE11MVT(Excluding : ESE11MV2)

800 pcs.Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

ESE11MHT1500 pcs.

Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

Quantity/

Carton


10000 pcs.Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)

ESE11MV28000 pcs.

Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)

ESE11MVT(Excluding : ESE11MV2)

4800 pcs.Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

ESE11MHT9000 pcs.

Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

No. 1 ESE11SV1 No. 2 ESE11MV1

Ver

tical

Typ

e

Gold platingESE11MV5


For refl ow soldering1-pole 1-throw

For wave soldering1-pole 1-throw

Oct. 201200



– ES45 –

6.4

2.35

0.1

3.15

ON startingposition

2.35

Lever center

Full travel

5.61.65

6.5

5.44.65

3.0

1.27

4.2

4.75

5.7

5.9

5.361.5

1.01.75

1.0

0.8

5.1

8.5

1.0φ1.2

3.1

1.75 1.5

2-φ1.10

2-φ1.20(1.65)

(5.4

)

5.36

A

3.0

1.03.2

5.25


5.26.4

2.2

3.0

1.651.0

5.4 7.5 11

.01.

0

1.75 φ1.20

–0.1

10.2

5

8.6

max

.

1.27

ON startingposition

1.65

0.8

Full travel

1.5 1.751.0

1.41.85

1.4

1.4

2.0

2.0

1.4

3.353.25

2-φ1.3 Hole

A


5.26.4

1.5 1.751.0

2.2

3.0

1.651.0

1.0

1.0

4.9

8.5

1.751.65φ1.2

1.27

0.8

6.1 7.75

0–0.1

4–1.41.85

3.253.35

2.0

2.0

4–1.

4

2–φ1.30 +0.050

A

ON starting position

Full travel


6.4

2.35

0.1

3.15

ON startingposition

2.35

Lever center

Full travel

5.61.65

6.5

5.44.65

3.0

1.27

4.2

4.75

5.7

5.9

5.361.75

1.01.5

1.0

0.8

5.1

8.5

1.0φ1.2

3.1

1.5 1.75

2-φ1.10

2-φ1.20(1.65)

(5.4

)

5.36

A

3.0

1.03.2

5.25




No. 5 ESE11SH1C No. 6 ESE11SH2C

Gold platingESE11SH5

Ver

tical

Typ

eH

oriz

onta

l Typ

e

No. 3 ESE11MV9 No. 4 ESE11MV2




Gold platingESE11SH6

Gold platingESE11MV13

Oct. 201200



– ES46 –

7.654.5

5.2

3.75 3.0

3.6

1.0

1.0

8.6

6.15 1.5

1.0

5.85 1.

03.

64.

51.

50.

9

2.85

1.15

1.61.75 1.5

2.25

φ1.00.11.65

7.0

6.25

4.6

6.3 7.

95 8.7

2.21.27

ON startingposition

Full travel

AB

ON startingposition

Full travel

φ1.30+0.05

hole0 φ1.30+0.05

hole0

6.15 6.15

4.50±0.05

5.85

5.85

2.85

±0.0

5

1.15

±0.0

5

7.65±0.05M2 screw hole

M2 screw hole


AView from side BView from side

φ1.2–0.10

φ1.2–0.10

φ2.0–0.1

0

7.654.5

5.2

3.75 3.0

3.6

1.0

1.0

8.6 φ1.2–0.1

6.15 1.5

1.0

5.85

1.0

3.6

4.5

1.5

0.9

2.85

1.15

1.61.75 1.5

2.25

φ1.00.11.65

7.0

6.25

4.6

6.3 7.

95 8.7

2.21.27

ON startingposition

Full travel

AB

ON startingposition

Full travel

φ1.30+0.05

hole0 φ1.30+0.05

hole0M2 screw hole

6.15 6.15

4.50±0.05

5.85

5.85

2.85

±0.0

5

1.15

±0.0

5

7.65±0.05

M2 screw hole


AView from side BView from side

0

φ1.2–0.10

φ2.0–0.1

0

7.6

0.8

4.9

0.2

0.5 0.1 φ1

.2

4.25 3.0

6.7

2.2

0.6

3.4

1.4

1.65

1.0

6.45.6

1.21.75 1.5

5.36

0.7 5.4

5.36

5.0

4.43.22.9

0.6–0.05

3.7–0.7

1.7 1.0

4.1 4.6

2.1

1.27

Full travel


C0.2

2-φ0.70 hole

1.75 1.51.4

1.6 1.6

A

0

0


7.6

0.8

4.9

0.2

0.5 0.1 φ1

.2

4.25 3.0

6.7

2.2

0.6

3.4

1.4

1.651.0

6.45.6

1.21.751.5

5.36

0.7 5.4

5.36

5.0

4.43.22.9

0.6–0.05

1.7 1.0

3.35

4.1 4.6

2.1

1.27

Full travel

C0.2

2-φ0.70

1.5 1.751.4

1.6 1.6


A

0


Dimensions in mm (not to scale)No. 7 ESE11MH1 No. 8 ESE11MH2

Gold platingESE11MH3

No. 9 ESE11HS1 No. 10 ESE11HS2

Hor

izon

tal T

ype

Gold platingESE11MH4





Oct. 201200



– ES47 –

8.0

2.2

5.2

0.6

1.51.65

1.6

1.0

0.8

0.7

3.6

8.7±

0.2

6.3 7.

95 8.7

4.5

0.9

1.5

(2.6

)1.

0

1.75 1.52.25

1.3+0.50

1.650.1

1.0

5.35

3.35

±0.0

5

7.0

3.35

3.6

1.5

3.0

1.0

0.50.6

1.27

0.5φ1.2–0.1

φ1.0

φ1.2

Full travelON startingposition

1.3+0.50

φ1.30+0.050

8.00+0.050

1.8+

0.5

0

A

0

PWB mounting hole for reference(PWB thickness=0.80±0.05)

View from A

With mounting hole1-pole 1-throw

Dimensions in mm (not to scale)H

oriz

onta

l Typ

e

No. 11 ESE11SF1A

Oct. 201200



– ES48 –

Commonterminal

LeverFrameFrame

Commonterminal

Commonterminal

Commonterminal

Commonterminal

MH, SH Type

1-pole 1-throw (N.O) 1-pole 1-throw (N.O) 1-pole 1-throw (N.O)

1

1

2C

C

C

MV, SV Type SF, HS Type

C C

16.4φ380±2.0

END TOP

16.0

±0.3

1.75

±0.1

(7.5

)

P=12.0±0.14.0±0.12.0±0.1

φ1.5 +0.10

13.5

Carrier tape

Cover tape

Drawing direction



END TOP

16.0

±0.3

1.75

±0.1

(7.5

)

P=12.0±0.14.0±0.12.0±0.1

φ1.5 +0.10

13.5

Carrier tape

Cover tape

Drawing direction



Circuit Diagram



ESE11MV1T, ESE11MV5T, ESE11MV9T

ESE11MH1T, ESE11MH2T

Oct. 201200



– ES49 –

E

1

S

2

E

3

2

4

3

5 6 7 8 91


6thFJ

Terminal TypeStraight TypeJ-bent Type

7th01

Positioning BossWithout Boss

With Boss

1HW Detector Switches

Type: ESE23

Features External dimensions : 4.1 mm5.0 mm, Height 1.5 mm Long over-travel (through-operation available) Usable as an operation switch (an input device)


Bidirectional operation, midpoint auto-return Type

Rec om mend ed Applications Detection of media in portable electronic equipment (CD-ROM, DVD, Digital still cameras, etc.) Operating switches for other electronic equipment.

Specifi cations







Poles and Throws 1-pole 2-throws (OFF at midpoint)

Full Travel (Pushing distance) With Boss 1.0 mm (1.5 mm) Without Boss 2.2 mm (1.5 mm)








Oct. 201200



– ES50 –

Pivot center

On position

Full position

PWB mounting hole for reference(Pitch tolerance : ±0.05)

0.61.4

C0.15

2.0

1.2

1.5 0.40.25

2.0

2.0

4-0.

9

6.44.2

0.8

2.0

-0+0.1

φ0.7

0.35 max. 0.35 max.

(0.5

)2.61.80.9

2.0

1.2

4.15

0.5

0.55

0.25

CC

21

5.0 φ0.6

1.0 2.

22.

5

0.18

R0.1

Pivot center

On position

Full position


2.61.80.9

R0.1

2.0

1.2

4.15

0.5

0.55

0.25

CC

21

5.0 φ0.6

1.0 2.

22.

5

0.18

0.61.4

C0.15

2.0

1.2

1.5 0.40.25

2.0

2.0

4-0.

9

6.44.2

0.8

2.0

-0+0.1

φ0.7

Commonterminal

Commonterminal

Terminal No.

Leverposition

F

b

a

c1 2

C

b aF

C

1 2

φ380.0±2.0 16.4

Drawing directionEND TOP

16.0

±0.3

13.5

1.75

±0.1

7.5±

0.1

P=8.0±0.14.0±0.12.0±0.1

φ1.5 +0.10Carrier tape

Cover tape


Packed portion (100 mm min.)(13 blanks min.)

(160 mm min.)Non-packed portionNon-packed portion

No. 1 ESE23F101 Straight terminal with boss(Without Boss available)

ESE23J101 J-bent terminal with boss(Without Boss available)

No. 2


1-pole 2-throws

Packaging Specifi cations

Circuit Diagram

Standard Reel Dimensions in mm (not to scale)


1-pole 2-throws (N . O)

1-pole 2-throws

Oct. 201200



– ES51 –

E

1

S

2

E

3

2

4

4

5 6 7 8 9

6th & 7thSVSHMVMH

Mounting Method & StyleVertical type for wave soldering

Horizontal type for wave solderingVertical type for reflow soldering

Horizontal type for reflow soldering

Explanation of Part Number

Recommended Applications Detection of media in portable electronic equipment (CD-ROM, DVD, Digital still cameras, etc.) Operating switches for other electronic equipment.

2W Detector Switches

Type: ESE24

Features A lever-type detector switch with high reliability using

sliding mechanical contacts Long over-travel (through-operation available) Used as an operation switch (an input device)

Bidirectional operation, auto-return to midpoint type.

1 ESE24SH type: 160 pcs. (Polyethylene Bag), 8000 pcs. (Reel Pack)2 ESE24SV, ESE24SH are excluded

Specifi cations

Rating 50 µA 3 Vdc to 10 mA 5 Vdc (Resistive load)Contact Resistance 500 m max. (Initial)Insulation Resistance 100 M min. (100 Vdc)Dielectric Withstanding Voltage 100 Vac for 1 minuteOperating Force 350 mN max.

Mounting Height

· Type SV 5.6 mm · Type SH 4.65 mm · Type MV 5.6 mm · Type MH 3.0 mm

Poles and Throws 1-pole 2-throws (OFF at midpoint)

Full Travel (Pushing distance)

· Type SV 6.1 mm (2.45 mm) · Type SH 2.6 mm (2.45 mm) · Type MV 6.1 mm (2.45 mm) · Type MH 1.4 mm (2.45 mm)

Operating Life 50000 cycles min.Temperature Range –10 °C to +70 °CHeat Resistance +80 °C for 96 hoursLow Temperature Resistance –25 °C for 96 hoursHumidity Resistance +40 °C 90 % to 95 % RH for 96 hours

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit ESE24MH, MV, SV, SH 200 pcs. Polyethylene Bag (Bulk) 1

ESE24MHT 1000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)2

ESE24MVT 500 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

Quantity/Carton ESE24MH, MV, SV, SH 10000 pcs. Polyethylene Bag (Bulk) ESE24MHT 6000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack) ESE24MVT 3000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

Oct. 201200



– ES52 –

5.6

5.6

7.5

7.258.4

4.32.7

7.54.32.7

8.55

8.55

1.0

5.05

3.5

2.1

0.2

3.01.0

3.01.0

1.51.5

4.653.65

1.0

3.0 0.5

C0.2

2.01.0

1.4

2.7

2.75

3.83.0 1.65

1.0

3.0

2.52.52.9

5.44.0

1.0

0.257.25

7.25

7.502.00 2.000.25

1.0

φ1.0

6-1.40

0.3

0.6

0.9

1.6

4.7

3.85

1.5

1.2

0.2

0.1

2.55

0.2

2.507.16

2.50

2.90

2.502.50

6-φ1

.10+0.0

5

0

2-φ1

.20

2-φ0.7

0 (Hole

)

+0.05

0

3-φ1.10 +0.050

2.52.52.50

5.50

2.503-1.40

1.60

1.60

4.50

2.20

2.502.50

5.80

3.60

2.5 2.5

68˚26'

68˚26'

29˚24'

7.54.32.7

68˚26'29˚24'

7.54.32.7

68˚26'29˚24'

29˚24'

1.6

5.5

2-φ1

.10+0.0

5

0

2.52.51.0

1 C 2

1 C 2

1 C 2

1 C 2

6.1

(Ful

lpos

ition

)

7.05

to7.

55(P

ushi

ngp

ositi

on)

4.45

(Rot

ativ

ece

nter

)

3.55

to4.

05(P

ushi

ngpo

sitio

n)0.

95(R

otat

ivece

nter

)

8.05

(ON

starti

ngpo

sition

)

PWB mounting hole for reference(Pitch tolerance: ±0.05)(PWB thickness=0.8)

PWB mounting hole for reference(Pitch tolerance: ±0.05)(PWB thickness=0.8)



6.1(

Fullp

ositio

n)8.

05(O

Nsta

rting

posit

ion)

2.6

(Ful

lpos

ition)

4.55(

ONsta

rting

posit

ion)

7.05

to7.

55(P

ushi

ngp

ositi

on)

2.35

to2.

85(P

ushi

ngp

ositi

on)

4.45

(Rot

ativ

ece

nter

)

0.25

(Rot

ativ

ece

nter

)

1.4

(Ful

lpos

ition)

3.35

(ON

star

ting

posit

ion)

Positioning boss

positioning boss

No. 1 ESE24SH1 Horizontal type for wave solderingESE24SV3 Vertical type for wave soldering No. 2


1-pole 2-throws 1-pole 2-throws

No. 3 ESE24MH1 Horizontal type for refl ow solderingESE24MV1 Vertical type for refl ow soldering No. 41-pole 2-throwsESE24MV1T (Embossed Taping)

1-pole 2-throwsESE24MH1T (Embossed Taping)

Oct. 201200



– ES53 –

φ380.0±2.0 24.4

END

END

TOP

TOP

ESE24MHT

24.0

±0.3

1.75

±0.1

(11.

5)

P=16.0±0.1

4.0±0.12.0±0.1 φ1.5

+0.10

21.5

ESE24MVT

24.0

±0.3

1.75

±0.1

(11.

5)

P=16.0±0.1

4.0±0.12.0±0.1 φ1.5

+0.10

21.5

0.49.9±0.2

Carrier tape

Carrier tape

Cover tape

Cover tape

Drawing direction

Drawing direction

Pilot holes

Pilot holes


Leading portion400 mm min.



F

b

a

c1 2

b aF

C1 2

Commonterminal

Terminal No.

Leverposition

Packaging Specifi cations

Circuit Diagram



1-pole 2-throws (N . O)

Oct. 201200

– ES54 –

Multi Function Switches

CONTENTS

Page



Jog Ball (EVQWJN)............................................................................................................... ES57

Oct. 201200



– ES55 –


Type, Series AppearancePart

NumbersCountry of

origin

External

Dimensions

LWH (mm)

Operating Force

Applicable

Soldering

SMD

Page

Jog Ball EVQWJN China 10.79.36.0Push : 1.0 N, 1.3 N, 1.6 N (Use of EVQP6 Type)

Refl ow

SolderingES57


Oct. 201200



– ES56 –

Type, Series Part Numbers Packaging Quantity/CartonMin.Q'ty/

Packing Unit

Jog Ball EVQWJN Tray Pack 1000 pcs. 200 pcs.

Minimum Quantity/Packing UnitPlease place an order by an integer multiple of the Quantity/Carton.

Oct. 201200

Multi Function Switches/EVQWJN


– ES57 –

E

1

V

2

Q

3

W

4

J N

5 6 7 8 9


PWB surface

Hall IC(Suggestion : Panasonic Semiconductor : AN48840B)

Push Switch(Suggestion : Panasonic Switch : EVQP6)

LED

<Ball rotary operation>Ball : 360 °

endless rotation+

Push operation

Specifi cations

Electrical Rating · 20 mA 15 Vdc (Use of EVQP6 Type) · 3 Vdc (Use of AN48840B Type)

Mechanical

Operating Force Push 1.0 N, 1.3 N, 1.6 N (Use of EVQP6 Type)

Resolution Rotate 11 pulses/ 360 °

Travel Push 0.9 mm

Endurance Operating lifeRotate 1000000 cycles min.

Push 1000000 cycles min. (Use of EVQP6 Type)



Quantity / Carton 1000 pcs.

Jog Ball

Type: EVQWJN


Recommended Applications Menu selection and confi rmation operations of portable

electronic equipment (Mobile phones, Digital cameras, Portable audio players, PDAs, and HPCs), car navigation systems, remote controllers, etc.

Features External dimensions : 10.7 mm9.3 mm, Height: 6.0 mm, Ball diameter : φ5.5 mm Long life : 1 million operations (each direction) Magnetic detection method. (Non-contact type) High resolution : 11 pulses/360 ° The ball rotation and push operation provide superior operability Light transmitting type (LED mounted on a PWB)

Note : Jog Ball requires, hall IC and a switch (LED) mounted on a PWB.

Usage Example

Oct. 201200

Multi Function Switches/EVQWJN


– ES58 –

(Op

erat

ing

heig

ht)

(Ball)

9.3

MA

X

O

6.0

+0.15–0.059.1

+0.

15–0

.05

9.1

+0.15–0.1φ7.2+0.15–0.1φ6.2

φ5.5

+0.

15–0

.10.

9

+0.

25–0

.20.

55

+0.

15–0

.14.

69+0.

15–0

.1

+0.05–0.1

3.69

10.7±0.1

2-2.

4±0.

1

2.2±

0.1

2.0±

0.1

2.0±

0.1

2.2±

0.1

1.0±

0.1

0.5±

0.1

7.8±0.12-0.8

VI:Input, VO:Output

Electric connecting plan

Note : A to D are not equipped with this product.

Recommended parts :Panasonic Semiconductor :AN48840B

Recommended parts :Panasonic Switch :EVQP6 (Without knob)

Usage (Reference)

PWB land pattern for reference

SW Land patternIC Land pattern

DCover

CPWB

IC Center

IC Center

IC Center

IC Center

A1 Pcs Light Touch Switch

B4 Pcs. Hall Effect IC(Piercing)

(1.7)

(2.8)

2.2

3.6(3

.8)

6.0

4.7

(1.4)

3.7

SW Land

(0.6)

41

2

35

2-φ0.85

4-0.424-0.884-1.724-3.33

4-1.

264-

2.7 4-

3.43

7.8

1 2 3 4,5GND VI VO N.C.


EVQWJN

Usage Example

Oct. 201200


– ES59 –

CONTENTS

Page


Checklist Befor Inquiry .......................................................................................................... ES62

Application Notes................................................................................................................... ES63

Common Specifi cations......................................................................................................... ES64


4 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQP6/6P6/7P6/9P6) ................................... ES66

4.5 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQPQ)....................................................... ES70

4.9 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQPL/3PL/5PL/PT) .................................. ES73

6 mm Square Thin Type SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQP0/Q2) .................................. ES76

3.0 mm2.0 mm SMD Light Touch Switches (EVPAW) ..................................................... ES80

3.0 mm2.6 mm SMD Light Touch Switches (EVPAF) ...................................................... ES83

3.5 mm2.9 mm SMD Light Touch Switches (EVPAA)...................................................... ES86

4.7 mm3.5 mm SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQP2/P9/3P2)......................................... ES89

6.0 mm3.5 mm SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQPE1/PN/5P) ........................................ ES93

3.5 mm2.9 mm Side-operational SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQP7/P3/9P7) ............ ES95

3.5 mm2.9 mm Side-operational Half Dive / SMD Light Touch Switches (EVPAN) ...... ES99

Small-sized Side-operational SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQPU) ............................... ES102

2.8 mm2.3 mm Side-operational Edge Mount Light Touch Switches (EVPAV)............ ES106

4.5 mm2.2 mm Side-operational Edge Mount Light Touch Switches (EVPAE)............ ES108

6.2 mm2.5 mm Side-operational Edge Mount Light Touch Switches (EVQP4) ............ES110

6.1 mm4.0 mm Side-operational SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQPS).........................ES113

5N Type Light Touch Switches (EVQPA/PB)......................................................................ES117

5N Type Side-operational Light Touch Switches (EVQPF) ...............................................ES120

5N Type 2R Light Touch Switches (EVQ2) ........................................................................ES122

5N Type Side-operational 4R Light Touch Switches (EVQPC).........................................ES124

Round Type 2R Light Touch Switches (EVQ11) ...............................................................ES126

6.0 mm3.5 mm Light Touch Switches (EVQPE) ..............................................................ES128

6.0 mm3.5 mm 2R Light Touch Switches (EVQPJ)........................................................ ES130

Over Travel Light Touch Switches (EVQP0).......................................................................ES132

4 mm Square Double-action SMD Light Touch Switches (EVPAH) ................................ ES134

6 mm Square Thin Type Double-action SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQPR/Q0/3PR) ....ES137

4.7 mm3.5 mm Double-action Side-operational SMD Light Touch Switches (EVPAJ)....ES140

6.2 mm3.7 mm Double-action Side-operational Edge Mount / SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQQ0) ... ES143

6 mm Square Long Travel SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQP0/P1/9P)..........................ES146

6 mm Square Long Travel 2 terminals SMD Light Touch Switches (EVPAS) .................ES149

6 mm Square Long Travel 2R Light Touch Switches (EVQPV)........................................ES152

8 mm Square Long Travel SMD Light Touch Switches (EVQQ1).................................... ES154

8 mm Square Long Travel 2R Light Touch Switches (EVQQJ) ....................................... ES156

10 mm Square Center Space Long Travel SMD Light Touch Switches (EVPAD) .......... ES158

Oct. 201200



– ES60 –

Type, Series Appearance PartNumbers

Country of origin

ExternalDimensions

LWH (mm)

OperatingForce

ApplicableSoldering

SMDVariety Page

4 mm Square SMD

EVQP6

JapanMalaysia

4.14.10.354.14.10.58

1.6 N2.4 N

Refl ow

Push Plate:With, WithoutGround Terminal:With, WithoutPositioning Boss:Without

ES66

EVQ6P6EVQ7P6EVQ9P6

4.14.10.431.0 N1.6 N2.4 N

Push Plate:WithoutGround Terminal:WithPositioning Boss:Without

4.5 mm Square SMD EVQPQ Japan 4.54.50.55 1.6 N2.4 N Refl ow

Push Plate:WithoutGround Terminal:WithoutPositioning Boss:Without

ES70

4.9 mm Square SMD

EVQPLEVQ3PLEVQ5PLEVQPT

JapanMalaysia

4.94.90.84.94.91.5

1.0 N1.6 N2.6 N3.5 N

Refl owPush Plate:With, WithoutGround Terminal:WithPositioning Boss:Without

ES73

6 mm SquareThin Type SMD

EVQP0EVQQ2 Malaysia

6.56.02.06.56.02.56.56.03.1

0.5 N, 0.6 N1.0 N, 1.3 N1.6 N, 2.6 N

3.5 N

Refl owPush Plate:WithGround Terminal:With, WithoutPositioning Boss:Without

ES76

3.0 mm2.0 mm SMD EVPAW JapanChina 3.02.00.6

1.6 N2.4 N3.3 N

Refl ow Push Plate:With ES80

3.0 mm2.6 mm SMD EVPAFJapan

MalaysiaChina

3.02.60.65 1.3 N1.6 N

Refl ow Push Plate:With ES833.02.60.7 2.4 N

3.4 N

3.5 mm2.9 mm SMD EVPAA JapanChina 3.52.91.7

1.0 N, 1.6 N2.4 N, 3.5 N

5.0 NRefl ow

Push Plate:WithGround Terminal:With, WithoutPositioning Boss:Without

ES86

4.7 mm3.5 mm SMDEVQP2EVQP9EVQ3P2

Japan 4.73.52.14.73.52.5

1.0 N, 1.6 N2.4 N, 2.5 N3.5 N, 5.0 N

Refl ow

Push Plate:WithPush Travel:Middele, ShortGround Terminal:With, WithoutPositioning Boss:Without

ES89

6.0 mm3.5 mm SMDEVQPE1EVQPNEVQ5P

Japan 6.03.54.36.03.55.0

1.0 N1.6 N2.4 N

Refl ow

Push Platel:WithEmbossed TapingGround Terminal:WithoutPositioning Boss:Without

ES93

3.5 mm2.9 mmSide-operational SMD

EVQP7EVQP3EVQ9P7

JapanChina

Malaysia3.52.91.35 1.6 N

2.2 N Refl ow

Terminal:Straight, J-bent, L-shapeGround Terminal:With, WithoutPositioning Boss:With, Without

ES95

3.5 mm2.9 mmSide-operationalHalf Dive / SMD

EVPAN JapanMalaysia 3.52.91.2 1.6 N

2.2 N Refl ow Terminal:StraightL-shape ES99

Small-sizedSide-operational SMD EVQPU Japan

China 4.73.51.65 1.6 N2.2 N Refl ow

Terminal:Straight, J-bent Ground Terminal:With, WithoutPositioning Boss:With, Without

ES102

2.8 mm2.3 mmSide-operationalEdge Mount

EVPAV JapanChina 2.82.31.95 1.6 N Refl ow Ground Terminal:With

(Cover Plate) ES106

4.5 mm2.2 mmSide-operationalEdge Mount

EVPAE Japan 4.52.252.9 1.6 N3.0 N Refl ow Ground Terminal:With

(Cover Plate) ES108

6.2 mm2.5 mmSide-operationalEdge Mount EVQP4 Japan 6.22.553.5

1.0 N, 1.6 N2.4 N, 2.5 N3.5 N, 5.0 N

Refl owMounted on pc board edge

Push Plate:WithPush Travel:Middele, ShortGround Terminal:With(Cover Plate)

ES110

6.1 mm4.0 mmSide-operational SMD EVQPS Japan 6.14.01.8 1.6 N

2.2 N Refl owTerminal : Straight, J-bentGround Terminal:With, WithoutPositioning Boss:With, Without

ES113



Oct. 201200



– ES61 –


Country of origin

ExternalDimensions

LWH (mm)

OperatingForce

ApplicableSoldering

SMDVariety Page

5N TypeEVQPA

JapanMalaysia

China6.06.04.36.06.05.06.06.07.06.06.09.5

1.0 N1.3 N1.6 N2.6 N

ManualWave Soldering

Push Pla te:WithGround Terminal:With, Without ES117

EVQPB JapanChina

5N TypeSide-operational EVQPF Japan

7.57.17.157.57.17.857.57.19.857.57.112.35

1.0 N1.3 N1.6 N2.6 N

ManualWave Soldering Push Plate:With ES120

5N Type 2R EVQ2 JapanMalaysia

6.06.04.36.06.05.06.06.07.06.06.09.5

1.0 N1.3 N1.6 N2.6 N

Wave Soldering Push Plate:WithGround Terminal:With, Without ES122

5N TypeSide-operational 4R EVQPC Japan 7.57.19.25

1.0 N1.3 N1.6 N2.6 N

Wave Soldering Push Plate:With ES124

Round Type 2R EVQ11Japan

MalaysiaChina

6.06.04.36.06.05.06.06.07.06.06.09.5

1.0 N1.3 N1.6 N2.6 N

Wave Soldering Push Plate:WithGround Terminal:Without ES126

6.0 mm3.5 mm EVQPE Japan 6.03.54.36.03.55.0

1.0 N1.6 N2.4 N

Wave Soldering

Push Plate:WithBulkGround Terminal:WithoutPositioning Boss:Without

ES128

6.0 mm3.5 mm 2R EVQPJ Japan 6.03.54.36.03.55.0

1.0 N1.6 N2.4 N

Wave Soldering

Push Platel:WithRadial TapingGround Terminal:WithoutPositioning Boss:Without

ES130

Over Travel EVQP0 JapanChina 6.26.27.45 0.74 N

1.3 N Wave Soldering Push Plate:WithGround Terminal:Without ES132

4 mm SquareDouble-action SMD EVPAH Japan 4.04.10.59

10.8 N,0.9 N,1.0 N21.6 N,2.0 N,2.6 N

Refl ow

Push Plate:WithTerminal:J-bentGround Terminal:With(Cover Plate)

ES134

6 mm Square Thin Type Double-action SMD

EVQPREVQQ0EVQ3PR

Japan 6.06.00.96.06.00.95

10.7 N,1.0 N22.6 N

Refl owPush Plate:With, WithoutGround Terminal:With, WithoutPositioning Boss:With, Without

ES137

4.7 mm3.5 mmDouble-actionSide-operational SMD

EVPAJ Japan 4.73.51.2 1 1.6 N 2 2.6 N

Refl ow StraightL-shape ES140

6.2 mm3.7 mmDouble-actionSide-operationalEdge Mount / SMD

EVQQ0 Japan 6.23.753.5 1 1.0 N 2 2.6 N

Refl owMounted on pc board edge/Refl ow

Push Plate:WithGround Terminal:With(Cover Plate)

ES143

6 mm SquareLong Travel SMD

EVQP0EVQP1EVQ9P

Japan 6.06.15.01.6 N, 2.0 N2.2 N, 2.5 N3.0 N, 3.5 N

Refl ow

Push Plate:WithPush Travel:1.0 mm, 1.3 mmGround Terminal:Without

ES146

6 mm SquareLong Travel 2 terminals SMD

EVPAS Japan 6.06.15.01.6 N, 2.0 N2.2 N, 2.5 N3.0 N, 3.5 N

Refl ow


ES149

6 mm SquareLong Travel 2R EVQPV Japan 6.06.15.0

1.6 N2.0 N2.2 N2.5 N3.5 N

Wave Soldering


ES152

8 mm SquareLong Travel SMD EVQQ1 Japan 8.58.56.5 4.0 N

5.0 N Refl ow Push Plate:WithGround Terminal:Without ES154

8 mm SquareLong Travel 2R EVQQJ Japan

8.08.05.08.08.05.58.08.06.1

0.8 N1.3 N2.5 N3.0 N

Wave Soldering

Push Plate:WithPush Travel:1.0 mm, 1.2 mm, 1.75mmGround Terminal:Without

ES156

10 mm Square Center Space Long Travel SMD EVPAD Japan 9.89.84.7 4.0 N Refl ow

Push Plate:WithPush Travel:1.0 mmGround Terminal:Without

ES158


Oct. 201200



– ES62 –


Com

mon


C-2 Modifi cation

Previous supplier


Purpose

C-3 Application

Equipment

Environment Indoor/Outdoor use, Stationary/Portable set, Car installationHigh humidity, SO2, NaCl


Ele

ctri

cal

Spe

cifi c

atio

ns

E-1 Ratings ( mA), ( V dc )

Sha

pes/

Dim

ensi

ons M-1 Operation

Operation type· Vertical (The push plate operation is perpendicular to the printed circuit board)· Horizontal (The push plate operation is parallel to the printed circuit board)

Operating force ( N)

Travel ( mm)

M-2 Anti-electrostatic Ground Terminal: With, Without

M-3 Shapes

Dimensions ( ) mm ( ) mm, hight( ) mm

Terminal Type(Refl ow) Flat Terminal,J-bent Terminal

Positioning Positioning Boss: with, without

Oth

ers

L-1 SolderingSoldering Manual, Flow, Refl ow

Soldering Conditions Temp.( °C ), Time ( s )

L-2 Packing Unit Polyethylene Bag (Bulk), Embossed Taping (Reel Pack), Raial Taping (Reel Pack), Stick




Notes:1. When selecting Switches, please consider using our standard products for better prices and short delivery times.2. Please inform the following items when ordering.

Checklist Before InquiryWhen specifying Light Touch Switches, please take advantage of our standard products for betterprice and delivery. Please inquire about the following items before ordering.

Oct. 201200



– ES63 –

5. Prohibited items on fi re and smoking1. Absolutely avoid use of a switch beyond its rated

range because doing so may cause a fi re. If misuse or abnormal use may result in conditions

in which the switch is used out of its rated range, take proper measures such as current interruption using a protective circuit.

2. The grade of nonfl ammability for resin used in Light Touch Switches is “94HB”, which is based on UL94 Standards (fl ammability test for plastic ma te ri als). Pro hib it use in a location where a spread ing fi re may be generated or prepare against a spreading fi re.

6. For use in equipment for which safety re quest ed

Although care is taken to ensure switch quality, vari a tion of contact resistance (increase), short cir cuits, open circuits, and temperature rise are some prob lems that might be generated.To de sign a set which places maximum em pha sis on safety, review the affect of any single fault of a switch in advance and perform virtually fail-safe design to ensure maximum safety by:1. preparing a protective circuit or a protective

device to improve system safety, and2. preparing a redundant circuit to improve system



Application NotesWhen using our Light Touch Switches, please ob serve the following items (“prohibited items”) and be cau tious of the following in order to prevent dan ger ous accidents and deterioration of performance.

1. Notes on soldering conditionsWhen performing solder dipping, check the soldering conditions according to the “Product Specifi cation for Information,” because the conditions vary with the prod uct. Do not wash the switch after solder dipping be cause fl ux may enter the switch, resulting in contact failure. Avoid use of jumper cables near the switches be cause fl ux may attach to them.1. Control the liquid level so that fl ux does not enter

the switch from the top.2. When performing manual soldering, perform it at a

temperature of 350 °C within 3 seconds.3. Do not apply a load to the switch lever after sol der ing.4. For refl ow soldering When performing refl ow soldering using a hot-air oven or an infrared oven, observe the following con di tions. Since the temperature applied to a

switch and its ter mi nals varies with the type and size of the PWB and the mounting density of the parts, suf fi cient ly check the conditions in advance.

5. When a board with double-sided through holes is used, do not make through holes immediately under the switch case. Otherwise, the switch case may fuse.

2. Notes on design of a set1. For switch mounting holes, refer to the “Rec om mend ed

PWB piercing plan” as described in “Di men sions.”2. For shapes of operating parts in a set, refer to

rec om mend ed shapes described in “Product Specifi cations for Information.”

3. Other prohibited items and notes1. Take care not to apply excessive load to a switch.

Doing so may cause terminal deformation, contact fail ure, and/or malfunction.

2. Suffi ciently check any generation of corrosive gas from the components in a set under actual oper ating conditions. Corrosive gas may cause contact failure and corrosive stress cracking of metal.

3. To prevent contact failure due to foreign matter(such as chips of a PWB and fl ux) entering aswitch, take care when handling a PWB after mounting. Do not stack the PWB’s.

4. Prohibited items and notes on storage con di tionsDo not store the switches under high temperatures and/or high humidity, or in a location where cor ro sive gas may be generated. Store the switches at room tem per a ture and room humidity in a packed con di tion. Use them within a maximum of 6 months af ter de liv ery. Check the date of manufacture on the pack age box and ap ply the “fi rst- in-fi rst-out” rule. If unpacked switch es must be stored as inventory, store them in a poly eth yl ene bag to keep out air.

Oct. 201200



– ES64 –

Packaging Methods for Radial Taping

Drawing-out of taped products Pull-strength of taped products

Drawing-out can be done from top or bottom of an inner car ton.

Taped products shall not be fully drawn-out from the tape when pulling in direction A at 5.0 N max.

Taped products shall not be drawn-out from the tape when pull ing in direction B at 1.0 N for 3 sec onds.

Common Specifi cations

A

B

17m

m

Adhesive tape side

Oct. 201200



– ES65 –


Type, Series Part No. Packaging Quantity/Carton

Min. Q'tyPacking Unit Notes

4 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switches EVQP6/6P6/7P6/9P6


50000 pcs. 10000 pcs.

4.5 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switches EVQPQ 50000 pcs. 10000 pcs.

4.9 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switches EVQPL/3PL/5PL/PT 25000 pcs. 5000 pcs.

6 mm Square Thin Type SMDLight Touch Switches

EVQP0 20000 pcs. 4000 pcs. H=2.0 mm

EVQQ2 10000 pcs. 2000 pcs. H=2.5 mm, 3.1 mm

3.0 mm2.0 mm SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAW 50000 pcs. 10000 pcs.

3.0 mm2.6 mm SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAF 40000 pcs. 8000 pcs.

3.5 mm2.9 mm SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAA 25000 pcs. 5000 pcs.

4.7 mm3.5 mm SMD Light Touch Switches EVQP2/P9/3P2 20000 pcs. 4000 pcs.

6.0 mm3.5 mm SMDLight Touch Switches EVQPE1/PN/5P

10000 pcs. 2000 pcs. H=5.0 mm

12500 pcs. 2500 pcs. H=4.3 mm

3.5 mm2.9 mm Side-operational SMDLight Touch Switches EVQP7/P3/9P7 25000 pcs. 5000 pcs.

3.5 mm2.9 mm Side-operational Half Dive / SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAN 35000 pcs. 7000 pcs.

Small-sized Side-operational SMDLight Touch Switches EVQPU 20000 pcs. 4000 pcs.

2.8 mm2.3 mm Side-operational Edge Mount Light Touch Switches EVPAV 40000 pcs. 8000 pcs.

4.5 mm2.2 mm Side-operational Edge Mount Light Touch Switches EVPAE 17500 pcs. 3500 pcs.

6.2 mm2.5 mm Side-operational Edge Mount Light Touch Switches EVQP4 12500 pcs. 2500 pcs.

6.1 mm4.0 mm Side-operational SMDLight Touch Switches EVQPS Embossed Taping

(Reel Pack) 16000 pcs. 4000 pcs.

5N Type Light Touch Switches EVQPA/PBPolyethylene Bag

(Bulk)

10000 pcs. 500 pcs.

5N Type Side-operational Light Touch Switches EVQPF 10000 pcs. 500 pcs.

5N Type 2R Light Touch Switches EVQ2

Radial Taping(Reel Pack)

10000 pcs. 1000 pcs.

5N Type Side-operational 4RLight Touch Switches EVQPC 7000 pcs. 700 pcs.

Round Type 2R Light Touch Switches EVQ11 25000 pcs. 2500 pcs.

6.0 mm3.5 mm Light Touch Switches EVQPE Polyethylene Bag(Bulk) 10000 pcs. 1000 pcs.

6.0 mm3.5 mm 2R Light Touch Switches EVQPJ Radial Taping(Reel Pack) 20000 pcs. 2000 pcs.

Over Travel Light Touch Switches EVQP0 Polyethylene Bag(Bulk) 10000 pcs. 500 pcs.

4 mm Square Double-action SMDLight Touch Switches EVPAH Embossed Taping


6 mm Square Thin Type Double-action SMD Light Touch Switches EVQPR/Q0/3PR Embossed Taping


4.7 mm3.5 mm Double-action Side-operational SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAJ Embossed Taping


6.2 mm3.7 mm Double-action Side-operational Edge Mount / SMD Light Touch Switches EVQQ0 Embossed Taping


6 mm Square Long Travel SMDLight Touch Switches EVQP0/P1/9P Embossed Taping


6 mm Square Long Travel 2 terminals SMDLight Touch Switches EVPAS Embossed Taping


6 mm Square Long Travel 2RLight Touch Switches EVQPV Radial Taping


8 mm Square Long Travel SMDLight Touch Switches EVQQ1 Embossed Taping


8 mm Square Long Travel 2RLight Touch Switches EVQQJ Radial Taping


10 mm Square Center Space Long Travel SMD Light Touch Switches EVPAD Embossed Taping


Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQP6/6P6/7P6/9P6


– ES66 –

E V Q

Product Code Height

1 2 3 4 5 6 8 97

Type4th, 5th, 6th· With Push Plate, Without Push Plate· Without Grounf Terminal

· Without Push Plate· With Grounf Terminal

P6

6P67P69P6

4 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switch es

Type: EVQP6/EVQ6P6/EVQ7P6/EVQ9P6

Features External dimensions : 4.1 mm4.1 mm Height :Without Push Plate 0.35 mm, With Push Plate 0.58 mm :Without Push Plate·With Ground Terminal 0.43 mm Long-life :1000000 cycles min. (Operating Force 1.6 N Type) Dust-proof structure

Product Chart


Specifi cations

TypeSnap action / Push-on type SPST

Without Push Plate With Push Plate

Electrical


Contact Resistance 500 mΩ max.

Insulation Resistance 50 MΩ min.

Dielectric With stand ing Voltage 100 Vac for 1 minute

Bouncing 3 ms max. (ON) 10 ms max. (OFF)

Mechanical Operating Force 1.0 N, 1.6 N, 2.4 N

Travel 0.2 mm (EVQ7P6 : 0.15 mm)

Endurance Operating Life 1.0 N, 1.6 N : 1000000 cycles min. 2.4 N : 500000 cycles min.

Operating Temperature –20 °C to +70 °C

Storage Temperature –40 °C to +85 °C (Bulk) –20 °C to +60 °C (Taping)



Note: Non washable

Height Without Push PlateH=0.35 mm

With Push PlateH=0.58 mm

Without Push PlateWith Ground Terminal

H=0.43 mmPackaging

Operating Force Embossed Embossed Embossed

1.0 N — — EVQ7P6

1.6 N EVQP6D EVQP6L EVQ6P6

2.4 N EVQP6P EVQP6Y EVQ9P6

Recommended Applications Operating switches for portable electronic equipment (Mobile phones, Camcorders, Portable audio players, etc.).

Oct. 201200



– ES67 –

B'

A'

B

A

0.25

0.58

0.43

B'

A'

B

A

φ1.8

φ2.6

(2-1.6)

(2.6

)(1

.5)

(2-0.8)

(1.5

)(1

.5)

A

B

A'

B'

(1.9

)(1

.4)

(1.4

)

(0.8

5)

(1.4)

(3.7)(2.4)

(1.6)

B

A

B'

A'

4.73.7

3.6

2.2

(5-φ0.4)

( 0.8)

(4.3)

0.6

2.9

4.1±

0.2

4.1±0.2

Circuit diagram

Part of A-A' terminal is exposedat area.Any land pattern or vias shall notbe provided at area.


Circuit diagram


Marking varies according to push force.

(1.7

)(0

.6)

(3)(1.6)

B'

A'

B

A

0.35

B

A

B'

A'Marking

0.25

4.1±0.2(4.3)

4.1±

0.2

2.90.

6Part of A-A' terminal is exposedat area.Any land pattern or vias shall notbe provided at area.

B'

A'

B

A(1.5

)(1

.4)

(1.5

)(1.6)

(2.4)(3.7)

(1.4)

(0.8

5)(1

.4)

(1.9

)

(5-φ0.4)

B'

A'

B

A

(1.4)

4.73.7

3.6

2.2

(0.8

5)

(0.8)

(1.3

)

No. 1


Part Numbers Operating Force Height Operating LifeEVQP6DB35 1.6 N 0.35 mm 1000000 cyclesEVQP6PB35 2.4 N 0.35 mm 500000 cycles

Part Numbers Operating Force Height Operating LifeEVQP6LB55 1.6 N 0.58 mm 1000000 cyclesEVQP6YB55 2.4 N 0.58 mm 500000 cycles

No. 2

EVQP6DEVQP6P

(Embossed Taping)

Surface mountFor refl ow solderingWithout push plate

EVQP6LEVQP6Y

(Embossed Taping)

Surface mountFor refl ow solderingWith push plate

Oct. 201200



– ES68 –

B'

A'

B

A

(0.5)4.1±0.2

4.1±

0.2

2.9 0.

6

(4.3)

A

B

A'

B'

4.73.7

B

A

Circuit diagram

2.35

2.05

0.7

2.2

3.6

A'

B'

(0.8)

(1.6)

(0.7

5)(1

.3)

(1.5

)

A

B

A'

B'(1

.9)

(1.4

)(0

.85)

(1.4)

(3.7)(2.4)

(1.6)

(1.4

)(1

.5)

(5-φ0.4)

(2.2

)

φ2.6

0.43

0.25

GND

–0.1

+0.

150.

38

Part of A-A' terminal is exposedat area.Any land pattern or vias shall notbe provided at area.


Operation point

Part Numbers Operating Force Height Operating Life

EVQ7P6B40 1.0 N 0.43 mm 1000000 cycles

EVQ6P6B40 1.6 N 0.43 mm 1000000 cycles

EVQ9P6B40 2.4 N 0.43 mm 500000 cycles

No. 3

EVQ7P6EVQ6P6EVQ9P6

(Embossed Taping)

Surface mountFor refl ow solderingWithout push plateWith Ground Terminal


Oct. 201200



– ES69 –

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole

Chip component Tape running direction

Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

0.3 mm max.

Without Push PlateWith Push Plate

Switch

Mounting surface

Test pole

Leaning angle range90 °±4 °

(vertical direction)φ1.51.3

R0.1±0.05

Slant 0.3 mm max.

Without Push Plate With Push Plate

R0.1±0.05

R0.1±0.05φ0.8

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.


Recommended Operating Conditions Recommended Shape of Test Pole

Recommended Refl ow Soldering Conditions

Embossed Carrier Tap ing

Unit: mm

Part No. Height A B W F E P1 P2 P0 D0 Dia. t1 t2

EVQP6 0.35/0.58

4.0±0.2 5.0±0.2 12.0+0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.30±0.05 0.5/0.7+0.2EVQ6P6EVQ7P6EVQ9P6

0.43–0–0.1

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.5 17.5±1.0 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5

–0.1

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPQ


– ES70 –

E

1

V

2

Q

3 4 5 6 7 8

P Q

Product Code Type Height

9

5 5B

Type Snap action/Push-on type SPST

Electrical



Insulation Resistance 50 M min. (at 100 Vdc)



Mechanical Operating Force

1.6 N±0.5 N2.4 N±0.6 N

Travel 0.2 mm±0.1 mm

Endurance Operating Life 200000 cycles min. (1.6 N), 50000 cycles min. (2.4 N)


Storage Tem per a ture –40 °C to +85 °C (Bulk) –20 °C to +60 °C (Taping)



Note: Non washable

4.5 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switches

Type: EVQPQ

Features External dimensions: 4.5 mm4.5 mm, Height 0.55 mm Lightweight: 20 mg (1/2 compared with coventional type)

Specifi cations


Recommended Applications Operation switches for portable electronic equipment

(Camcorders, Portable audio players, etc.)

Oct. 201200



– ES71 –

A

C D

B

Circuit diagram

4.8

3.0

2.85

4.85


A B

C D

4.50

4.3

+–

0.250.15

0.45+–

0.150.10

0.6

4.5

0.35

0.55+–

0.150.10

3.7

4.3

A B

DC

Film holder

Film holder

Date code

Month

Year

Actuator

Button


Part Numbers Operating Force Height Operating LifeEVQPQHB55 1.6 N 0.55 mm 200000 cyclesEVQPQMB55 2.4 N 0.55 mm 50000 cycles

EVQPQ

(Embossed Taping)

Before using this product If the inclination of the actuator is widened by using soft materials, such as rubber, for the setting side of the op er a tion

section (connecting area between button and acturator), it may cause functional problems.

Oct. 201200



– ES72 –

φ0.8

R0.1 mm±0.05 mm

for Reflowsolderingtype 0.3 mm max.

Switch

Mounting surface

Test pole


(vertical direction)

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.





Unit: mm

–0.1


EVQPQ 0.55 5.0+0.30 4.6+0.3 12.0±0.1 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.30±0.05 0.65+0.2–0–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ370.0±2.0 φ50.0 min. φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 14.0±1.5 — 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5

–0.25

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPL/3PL/5PL/PT


– ES73 –

E V Q P L


1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9

A

7

Note: Non washable

Specifi cations

4.9 mm Square SMD Light Touch Switch es

Type: EVQPL/EVQ3PL EVQ5PL/EVQPT

Features External dimensions : 4.9 mm4.9 mm,

Height: 0.8 mm(Without push plate), 1.5 mm(With push plate)


Product Chart

Height H=0.8 mm H=1.5 mm(With Push Plate)

Packaging

Operating ForceEmbossed Embossed

1.0 N EVQPLB EVQPLD, EVQPT5

1.6 N EVQPLF EVQPLH, EVQPT9

2.6 N EVQPLK EVQPLM

3.5 N EVQ5PL EVQ3PL


Electrical







1.0 N±0.5 N1.6 N±0.5 N

2.6 N±0.6 N3.5 N±1.0 N

Travel 0.25 mm +0.10 mm

Endurance Operating Life 500000 cycles min. 200000 cycles min.





–0.20


(Notebook PC, Camcorders, Portable audio players, etc.) Operation switches for car audio systems

Oct. 201200



– ES74 –

4.9

4.6

1.2

4.64.9

3.7

B'A'

BA

0.2

0.3

2.5

0.40.8

0.050.45

5.0±

0.5

φ3.2

3.14.3

(4.6)(5.5)

A B

A’ B’

(1)

3.4

5.4

GND

Operating part

Be careful not toscratch the film

PWB land pattern for reference Circuit diagram

4.9

4.6

1.2

φ2.4

4.64.9

φ2.2

(3.4

)(3

.8)

φ4

φ4.4

3.7

3.14.3

(4.6)(5.5)

A B

A’ B’

(1)

3.4

5.4

B’A’

BA

0.2

0.3

2.5

0.40.81.2

0.050.45

5±0.

5

GND

1.5 0.20.1

+–

Operating part

PWB land pattern for reference Circuit diagram


No. 1

Part Numbers Operating Force Height Operating LifeEVQPLBA08 1.0 N 0.8 mm 500000 cyclesEVQPLFA08 1.6 N 0.8 mm 500000 cyclesEVQPLKA08 2.6 N 0.8 mm 200000 cyclesEVQ5PLA08 3.5 N 0.8 mm 200000 cycles

Part Numbers Operating Force Height Operating LifeEVQPLDA15/PT5A15 1.0 N 1.5 mm 500000/2000000 cyclesEVQPLHA15/PT9A15 1.6 N 1.5 mm 500000/2000000 cyclesEVQPLMA15 2.6 N 1.5 mm 200000 cyclesEVQ3PLA15 3.5 N 1.5 mm 200000 cycles

No. 2

EVQPLBEVQPLFEVQPLKEVQ5PL

(Embossed Taping)

Surface mountFor refl ow solderingWithout push plate

EVQPLD/PT5EVQPLH/PT9EVQPLMEVQ3PL

(Embossed Taping)

Surface mountFor refl ow solderingWith push plate

Oct. 201200



– ES75 –

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

φ1.0

R0.2±0.05

for Reflowsolderingtype

0.3 mm max.

Switch

Mounting surface

Test pole



180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.





Unit: mm


EVQPLEVQ3PLEVQ5PLEVQPT

0.8/1.5 5.0±0.2 5.0±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.35±0.05 1.0/1.7±0.2–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ370.0±2.0 φ50.0 min. φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 14.0±1.5 — 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQP0/Q2


– ES76 –

E

1

Product Code

V

2

Q

3

QP

4

20

5 6 7 8 9

4th & 5th

P0

Q2

TypeOverstroke travel

Short push travel

Height Push Plate Color

Note: Non washable

Specifi cations

Features External dimensions : 6.5 mm6.0 mm, Height 1.8 mm

(Excluding the push plate) With or without ground terminal, height, operating force Overstroke travel


6 mm Square Thin Type SMDLight Touch Switches

Type: EVQP0 EVQQ2

Recommended Applications Operating switches for other electronic equipment Operation switches for PC mouse Car audio systems

Travel Type Short Push Travel Overstroke Travel


Electrical





Bouncing 10 ms max. (ON, OFF)

MechanicalOperating Force

0.5 N, 1.0 N, 1.3 N, 1.6 N, 2.6 N, 3.5 N

0.6 N, 1.0 N

Travel 0.25 mm (0.2 mm : 0.5N, 1.0N) 0.3 mm

Endurance Operating Life

0.5 N : 2000000 cycles min. 1.0 N, 1.3 N, 1.6 N : 1000000 cycles min. 2.6 N : 200000 cycles min. 3.5 N : 100000 cycles min.

0.6 N : 2000000 cycles min. 1.0 N : 1000000 cycles min.



Minimum Quantity/Packing UnitH=2.0 mm 4000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)H=2.5 mm, 3.1 mm 2000 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)

Quantity/CartonH=2.0 mm 20000 pcs.H=2.5 mm, 3.1 mm 10000 pcs.

Oct. 201200



– ES77 –

Circuit Diagram PWB land pattern for reference2.

5

0.8

4.0

6.0

6.5

φ2

1.8

B

A

B'

A'

B

A

B'

A'

φ3

(6.6)

(0.8

)

1m

in.

(3.6) (3.2)(3.2)

4.0

Part Numbers Operating Force Height Push Plate Color Ground Terminal Operating Life

EVQP0N02B 0.6 N 2.5 mm Blue Without 2000000 cycles

EVQP0P02B 0.6 N 2.5 mm Blue With 2000000 cycles

EVQP0Q02Q 1.0 N 2.5 mm Gray Without 1000000 cycles

EVQP0S02Q 1.0 N 2.5 mm Gray With 1000000 cycles

No. 1


EVQP0

Overstroke travel : 0.35 mmWith J-bent terminals

Oct. 201200



– ES78 –

Circuit Diagram PWB land pattern for reference

B

A

B'

A'

B

A

B'

A'

H

φ3

0.8

4.0

6.0

6.5

1.8

(6.6)

(0.8

)

φ3.8

1m

in.

(3.6) (3.2)(3.2)

4.0


Part Numbers Operating Force H=Height Push Plate Color Ground Terminal Operating LifeEVQQ2B01W 0.5 N 2.0 mm White Without 2000000 cyclesEVQQ2B02W 0.5 N 2.5 mm White Without 2000000 cyclesEVQQ2B03W 0.5 N 3.1 mm White Without 2000000 cyclesEVQQ2D01W 0.5 N 2.0 mm White With 2000000 cyclesEVQQ2D02W 0.5 N 2.5 mm White With 2000000 cyclesEVQQ2D03W 0.5 N 3.1 mm White With 2000000 cyclesEVQQ2F01W 1.0 N 2.0 mm White Without 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2F02W 1.0 N 2.5 mm White Without 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2F03W 1.0 N 3.1 mm White Without 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2H01W 1.0 N 2.0 mm White With 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2H02W 1.0 N 2.5 mm White With 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2H03W 1.0 N 3.1 mm White With 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2K01W 1.3 N 2.0 mm White Without 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2K02W 1.3 N 2.5 mm White Without 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2K03W 1.3 N 3.1 mm White Without 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2M01W 1.3 N 2.0 mm White With 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2M02W 1.3 N 2.5 mm White With 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2M03W 1.3 N 3.1 mm White With 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2P01W 1.6 N 2.0 mm White Without 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2P02W 1.6 N 2.5 mm White Without 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2P03W 1.6 N 3.1 mm White Without 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2S01W 1.6 N 2.0 mm White With 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2S02W 1.6 N 2.5 mm White With 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2S03W 1.6 N 3.1 mm White With 1000000 cyclesEVQQ2U01W 2.6 N 2.0 mm White Without 200000 cyclesEVQQ2U02W 2.6 N 2.5 mm White Without 200000 cyclesEVQQ2U03W 2.6 N 3.1 mm White Without 200000 cyclesEVQQ2W01W 2.6 N 2.0 mm White With 200000 cyclesEVQQ2W02W 2.6 N 2.5 mm White With 200000 cyclesEVQQ2W03W 2.6 N 3.1 mm White With 200000 cyclesEVQQ2Y01W 3.5 N 2.0 mm White Without 100000 cyclesEVQQ2Y02W 3.5 N 2.5 mm White Without 100000 cyclesEVQQ2Y03W 3.5 N 3.1 mm White Without 100000 cyclesEVQQ2201W 3.5 N 2.0 mm White With 100000 cyclesEVQQ2202W 3.5 N 2.5 mm White With 100000 cyclesEVQQ2203W 3.5 N 3.1 mm White With 100000 cycles

No. 2

EVQQ2

Short push travel : 0.25 mmWith J-bent terminals

HeightH

2.0±0.22.5±0.23.1±0.2

Oct. 201200



– ES79 –

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

Feeding hole Chip pocket


0.3 mm max.

Switch

Test pole



Mounting surfaceR0.1 mm±0.05 mm R0.1 mm±0.05 mm

2 mm Type 2.5 mm, 3.1 mm Type

φ3 –0.5+0 φ4 –0

+0.5

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.



Part No. Height A B W F E P1 P2 P0 D0 Dia t1 t2

EVQQ22.0

6.7±0.2 7.4±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.30±0.05

2.2±0.2

2.5/3.1 3.2±0.2

EVQP0 2.5 2.8±0.2

_0

Unit: mm


Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0 — —

Recommended Shape of Test Pole Recommended Operating Conditions

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAW


– ES80 –

E

1

V

2

P

3 4 5 6 7 8

A W


9

Note: Non washable

Specifi cations

Features External dimensions: 3.0 mm2.0 mm, Height 0.6 mm High operability

Equipped with an actuator (push plate)


3.0 mm2.0 mm SMD Light Touch Switches

Type: EVPAW


(Mobile phone, Portable audio)


Electrical






MechanicalOperating Force 1.6 N, 2.4 N, 3.3 N

Travel 1.6 N, 2.4 N : 0.13 mm 3.3 N : 0.15 mm

Endurance Operating Life 300000 cycles min.





Oct. 201200



– ES81 –

2-1.

3

2-1.

5

2

with

outt

hefil

man

dre

mai

nder

ofth

eg

ate

A'A

General dimension tolerance : ± 0.05( )dimensions are reference dimensions.

This reference specifications are subject to change.

(φ0.85)

3.5

3.8

2-3.69

2-0.

25

2-1.

45

2-2.85

2.7

(0.0

4)0.

1m

ax.

Circuit diagram

A A'


Soldering thickness t=0.08±0.01

If you design different stencil mask and land pattern,or apply different soldering thickness compared withour recommended pattern as described above,please ask us in advance.

Stencil mask plan

A A'

0.6±0.1

(0.385)

3Without film

0.1 max.



EVPAWBA2A 1.6 N 0.6 mm 300000 cycles

EVPAWCA2A 2.4 N 0.6 mm 300000 cycles

EVPAWEA2A 3.3 N 0.6 mm 300000 cycles

EVPAW

(Embossed Taping)

Oct. 201200



– ES82 –

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.

Tape width=12.0 mm

Taping condition : Lack of products in the middle of taping should beone MAX, but total quantity specified in thespecifications should be secured.

Peeling off strength of top tape : It should be within 0.2N to 1. ON at165 degree in peeling off angle.

Joint of carrier tape : One joint per one reel may exist.

φGD

Feeding hole

KC

F

A

HE

I

B J

t

Chip pocket

Tape running direction

Soldering Time (s)

(Normal Temp.)

Fan or Normal Temp.

200

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

240MAX.

130

90 to 110

300

55 to 6530 to 40

217

G

FA

B

E

C

D



Unit: mm


Part No. Height A B C D E F G H I J K t

EVPAW 0.6 12.0±0.3 1.75±0.10 5.5±0.1 8.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 1.5±0.3 3.8±0.2 2.3±0.2 0.75±0.20 (10.25) 0.3+0.15

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item F G

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0

–0.10

Refl ow temperature may vary by location even in the same refl ow condition.Please check the refl ow temperature at terminals and at the top of a switch to make sure the both temperatures are withiin the specifi cation.

If even one of them is out of the specifi cations, please adjust.

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAF


– ES83 –

E

1

V

2

P

3 4 5 6 7 8

A F


9

Note: Non washable

Specifi cations

Features External dimensions: 3.0 mm2.6 mm, Height 0.65 mm High operability

Equipped with an actuator (push plate) Low temperature use



Type: EVPAF


(Mobile phone, Portable audio)


Electrical






MechanicalOperating Force 1.3 N, 1.6 N, 2.4 N, 3.4 N

Travel 0.15 mm

Endurance Operating Life 1.3 N, 1.6 N, 3.4 N : 100000 cycles min., 2.4 N : 500000 cycles min.





Oct. 201200



– ES84 –

Circuit diagram


B'

A'

B

A

0.48

4-0.

352-3.4

2.6

3

4-0.

52-

1.8

B'

A'

B

A

φ0.65

0.70

(Push plate)

(With

outt

here

mai

nder

ofth

eg

ate)

(Adhesive)

( 0.75)

Part of A-A' terminal is exposed at area.Any land pattern or vias shall not be provided at area.

(0.4)

(0.6

5)

(0.8

)

(1.1

5)

(1.5)(2-2.5)

2-2.4±0.052-3.5±0.05

2-1.

2±0.

05

2-2.

4±0.

05

A

B B'

A'

1.6

2.6

Circuit diagram


B'

A'

B

A

0.44

4-0.

352-3.4

2.6

3

4-0.

52-

1.8

B'

A'

B

A

φ0.65

0.65

(Push plate)

(With

outt

here

mai

nder

ofth

eg

ate)

(Adhesive)

( 0.75)


(0.4)

(0.6

5)

(0.8

)

(1.1

5)

(1.5)(2-2.5)

()

EV

PA

FKB

654-

0.35

+0.

1–0

.15

2-2.4±0.052-3.5±0.05

2-1.

2±0.

052-

2.4±

0.05

A

B B'

A'

1.6

2.6



EVPAFKB65 1.3 N 0.65 mm 100000 cycles

EVPAFFB65 1.6 N 0.65 mm 100000 cycles


EVPAF5B70 3.4 N 0.7 mm 100000 cycles


No. 1

EVPAF

(Embossed Taping)

With J-bent terminals

No. 2

EVPAF

(Embossed Taping)


Oct. 201200



– ES85 –

Soldering Time (s)

(Normal Temp.)

Fan or Normal Temp.

180

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

) 260MAX.

150

90±30 40±10

230

f1.5 to f2.0

R0.3 mm±0.05 mm

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

2-2.4±0.052-3.5±0.05

2-1.

2±0.

052-

2.4±

0.05

B'

A'

B

A

A

B B'

A'

1.6

2.6

0.39

4-0.

3

2-3.4

2.6

3

4-0.

52-

1.8

(0.4)

(0.6

5)

(0.8

)

(1.1

5)(1.5)

(2-2.5)

B'

A'

B

A

φ0.65

0.65

(Push plate)

Circuit diagram

(With

outt

here

mai

nder

ofth

ega

te)

(Adhesive)( 0.75)

+0.

15–0

.1



P2 P0

P1t2

t1

fD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

Embossed Carrier Tap ing Recommended Refl ow Soldering Conditions


EVPAFEVP0AF 0.65/0.70 3.75±0.2 2.95±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.1 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5±0.3 0.3±0.1 0.8±0.2

Unit: mm


Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0 _ _

Recommended Shape of Test Pole


EVP0AFB65 1.6 N 0.65 mm 500000 cycles



No. 3

EVPAF

Low profi le(Embossed Taping)


Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAA


– ES86 –

E

1

V

2

P

3 4 5 6 7 8

A A


9

Push Plate ColorKWQ

Blackwhitegray

Note: Non washable

Specifi cations

Features External dimensions : 3.5 mm2.9 mm, Height 1.7 mm High operating force available (Operating force : 5.0 N max.) Optional ground terminal



Type: EVPAA


(Mobile phones, Digital still cameras, etc.) Operating switches for keyless entry systems


Electrical






MechanicalOperating Force 1.0 N, 1.6 N, 2.4 N, 3.5 N, 5.0 N


Endurance Operating Life 1000000 cycles min. (1.0 N) 200000 cycles min. (1.6 N, 2.4 N, 3.5 N) 100000 cycles min. (5.0 N)





Oct. 201200



– ES87 –

(Tolerance ±0.2)

Operating part

Circuit diagram


+0−0.54.3

+0.

2−0

.11.

7

1.4±

0.1

3.5

2.9

0.6

φ1.8

0.5±

0.1

0.62

±0.1

1.5

2.2

2.1±

0.1

2.5±

0.1

0.4±

0.1

2.2±0.14.5±0.1

(2.8)

1

2

1

2

1’

2’

1’

2’

Part Numbers Ground Terminal Operating Force Push Plate Color Operating Life

EVPAA002K Without 1.0 N Black 1000000 cycles

EVPAA102K With 1.0 N Black 1000000 cycles

EVPAA202K Without 1.6 N Black 200000 cycles

EVPAA302K With 1.6 N Black 200000 cycles

EVPAA402W Without 2.4 N White 200000 cycles

EVPAA502W With 2.4 N White 200000 cycles

EVPAA602W Without 3.5 N White 200000 cycles

EVPAA702W With 3.5 N White 200000 cycles

EVPAA802Q Without 5.0 N Grey 100000 cycles

EVPAA902Q With 5.0 N Grey 100000 cycles

EVPAA

(Embossed Taping)

Thickness : 1.7 mm



Oct. 201200



– ES88 –

φ3.3 to φ3.7

R0.1 mm±0.05 mm

0.3 mm max.

Switch

Mounting surface

Test pole

Leaning angle range90 ˚±4 ˚


T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.




EVPAA 1.7 4.5±0.2 3.8±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.3±0.1 1.85±0.20–0

Unit: mm


Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0 — —


Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQP2/P9/3P2


– ES89 –

1

E

2

V

3

Q

4 5 6 7 8 9

Product Code Type Height Push Plate Color

PP

2/93

4.7 mm3.5 mm SMD Light Touch Switch es

Type: EVQP2/EVQP9/EVQ3P2

Specifi cations

Features External dimensions : 4.7 mm3.5 mm, Height : Middle Push Travel 2.5 mm Short Push Travel 2.1 mm, 2.5 mm High operating force and long operational life High mountability with J-bent (4 terminals)

Recommended Ap pli ca tions Operation switches for portable electronic equipment

(Mobile phones, Digital still cameras, Camcorders, Portable audio players, etc.)

Keyless entry systems (automotive) Car audio equipment


Travel Type Middle Push Travel Short Push Travel

Type Snap action / Push-on type SPST

Electrical



Insulation Resistance 100 M min.

Dielectric With stand ing Voltage 250 Vac (1 minute)


Mechanical Operating Force 2.5 N, 3.5 N, 5.0 N 1.0 N, 1.6 N, 2.4 N, 3.5 N, 5.0 N

Travel 0.70 mm±0.20 mm 0.25 mm+0.05 mm

Endurance Operating Life 2.5 N:1000000 cycles min.

3.5 N: 500000 cycles min.


1.0 N, 1.6 N: 1000000 cycles min.








–0.15

Oct. 201200



– ES90 –

0.6

2.5

3

4

1

2

0.6±0.1

1.7±0.1

2.7±

0.1

3.7±0.16.6±0.1

4.7±

0.1

φ1.8

1 2

3 4

0.7±

0.1


Circuit diagram

+0.2–0.1

3.5±0.11.65±0.1

5.5

+0 –0.3


No. 1

Part Numbers Ground Terminal Operating Force Height Push Plate Color Operating Life

EVQP2B02B With 2.5 N 2.5 mm Blue 1000000 cycles

EVQP2D02Q With 3.5 N 2.5 mm Grey 500000 cycles

EVQP2F02K With 5.0 N 2.5 mm Black 200000 cycles

EVQP2H02B Without 2.5 N 2.5 mm Blue 1000000 cycles

EVQP2K02Q Without 3.5 N 2.5 mm Grey 500000 cycles

EVQ3P202K Without 5.0 N 2.5 mm Black 200000 cycles

EVQP2EVQ3P2

Middle push travelWith J-bent terminals(With Ground terminal)

Oct. 201200



– ES91 –

4.7±

0.1

3.5±0.1

φ2

3 4

1 2

0.6

1.65±0.1

2.6

0.6±0.1

1.7±0.1

2.7±

0.1 0.

7±0.

1

3.7±0.16.6±0.1

3

4

1

2

1.6


Circuit diagram

H

5.5

2.1 +0.2–0.1

2.5 +0.2–0.1

H

+0 –0.3


No. 2

Part Numbers Ground Terminal Operating Force H=Height Push Plate Color Operating Life

EVQP2P02M With 1.0 N 2.1 mm Natural 1000000 cycles

EVQP2P02W With 1.0 N 2.5 mm Natural 1000000 cycles

EVQP2R02M With 1.6 N 2.1 mm Natural 1000000 cycles

EVQP2R02W With 1.6 N 2.5 mm Natural 1000000 cycles

EVQP2T02M With 2.4 N 2.1 mm Natural 500000 cycles

EVQP2T02W With 2.4 N 2.5 mm Natural 500000 cycles

EVQP2V02M With 3.5 N 2.1 mm Natural 200000 cycles

EVQP2V02W With 3.5 N 2.5 mm Natural 200000 cycles

EVQP2002M Without 1.0 N 2.1 mm Natural 1000000 cycles

EVQP2002W Without 1.0 N 2.5 mm Natural 1000000 cycles







EVQP9H02M With 5.0 N 2.1 mm Natural 200000 cycles

EVQP9H02W With 5.0 N 2.5 mm Natural 200000 cycles

EVQP9P02M Without 5.0 N 2.1 mm Natural 200000 cyclesEVQP9P02W Without 5.0 N 2.5 mm Natural 200000 cycles

EVQP2

Short push travelWith J-bent terminals(With Ground terminal)

Oct. 201200



– ES92 –

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

0.3 mm max.

Switch

Mounting surface

Test pole

Leaning angle range90 ˚±4 ˚

(vertical direction)φ3.3 to φ3.7

R0.1 mm±0.05 mm R0.1 mm±0.05 mm

Middle PushTravel Type

Short PushTravel Type

φ3

Recommended Refl ow Soldering Conditions Embossed Carrier Tap ing


Unit: mm

Part No. Height A B W F E P1 P2 P0 D0 Dia. t1 t2EVQP2EVQP9EVQ3P2

2.12.5

6.0±0.2 4.7±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.3±0.1 2.7±0.2–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ370.0±2.0 φ50.0 min. φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 14.0±1.5 — 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5


Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPE1/PN/5P


– ES93 –

A B

E V Q P5


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Push Plate ColorOperating Force

6.0 mm3.5 mm SMD Light Touch Switch es

Type: EVQPE1/EVQPN/EVQ5P


Product Chart

Type

Operating ForceSMD Height

1.0 N±0.5 N EVQPE1 H=4.3 mm

H=5.0 mm 1.6 N±0.5 N EVQPNF

2.4 N±0.6 N EVQ5PN

Specifi cations

–0.10


Electrical

Circuit Diagram


Contact Re sis tance 100 m max.

Insulation Re sis tance 100 M min. (at 100 Vdc)




1.0 N±0.5N(Low force type)

1.6 N±0.5 N(Standard)

2.4 N±0.6 N



Operating Tem per a ture –30 °C to +85 °C


Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit2000 pcs.

Embossed Taping(Reel Pack)(H = 5.0 mm)

2500 pcs.Embossed Taping(Reel Pack)

(H = 4.3 mm)

Quantity/Carton 10000 pcs.(H = 5.0 mm)

12500 pcs.(H = 4.3 mm)

Features External dimensions : 6.0 mm3.5 mm, Height 4.3 mm, 5.0 mm

Recommended Applications Operating switches for other electronic equipment

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPE1/PN/5P


– ES94 –

3.5±0.5

1.0±0.21.4

A

AB

B

6.0

Circuit diagram

( 2.6

)

0.5 max.3.5H

1.37.4

3.4

1.6


3.0

7.2

max

.

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.


Part Numbers Operating Force H=Height Push Plate Color Operating Life

EVQPE104K 1.0 N 4.3 mm Black 50000 cycles


EVQPNF04M 1.6 N 4.3 mm Natural 50000 cycles

EVQPNF05M 1.6 N 5.0 mm Natural 50000 cycles

EVQ5PN04K 2.4 N 4.3 mm Black 30000 cycles

EVQ5PN05K 2.4 N 5.0 mm Black 30000 cycles

EVQPE1EVQPNFEVQ5PN

(Embossed Taping)



Unit: mm


EVQPE1EVQPNEVQ5P

4.3/5.0 5.8±0.2 7.9±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.4±0.05 4.5/5.2±0.2–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ370.0±2.0 φ50.0 min. φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 14.0±1.5 — 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5

Oct. 201200



– ES95 –

Mounting Height1.35 mm

7th & 8th01

Push Plate ColorBlack

9thK

E

1

V

2

Q

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4th, 5th, 6th

0 1 K

Type

P7

P3

9P7

· Terminal Type· With Ground Terminal, Without Ground Terminal· With Boss, Without Boss· Operating Force


Electrical






Mechanical

Operating Force 1.6 N, 2.2 N

Push Travel 0.2 mm

Push Strength 30 N (1 minute)



Storage Tem per a ture –40 °C to +85 °C (Bulk)

–20 °C to +60 °C (Taping)



Specifi cations

3.5 mm2.9 mm Side-operational SMD


Type: EVQP7/EVQP3/EVQ9P7


Features External dimensions : 3.5 mm2.9 mm, Height 1.35 mm A wide range of terminal type : L-shape, J-bent, Straight High mount ability Push plate strength enhanced type



Oct. 201200



– ES96 –

4.7

1.48

±0.1

0.62

±0.1

1.35

2.9

3.55

1.7

0.5±

0.1

3.5

(2.8)

0.4±

0.1

2.5±

0.1

1.2±0.1

Circuit diagram

2.2±0.1


5.0±0.1

2

1

2

1

1,

2,

1,

2,

5.0±0.12.2±0.1

2.5±

0.1

0.4±

0.1

3.5

Circuit diagram

0.5±

0.1 1.2±0.1

1.7

3.55 2.

9

1.35

0.62

±0.1

1.48

±0.1

4.7

(2.8)

1.8±

0.1

-0.1+0φ0.65

φ0.2

0.2

0.5

1.8±

0.05

-0+0.2

2-φ0.7

1,

2,

1,

2,


2

1

2

1


No. 1

Part Numbers Operating Force Height Push Plate Color Operating Life

EVQP7A01K 2.2 N 1.35 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQP7J01K 1.6 N 1.35 mm Black 100000 cycles


EVQP7C01K 2.2 N 1.35 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQP7L01K 1.6 N 1.35 mm Black 100000 cycles

No. 2

EVQP7AEVQP7J

(Embossed Taping)

With straight terminalsWithout boss

EVQP7CEVQP7L

(Embossed Taping)

With straight ter mi nalsWith boss

Oct. 201200



– ES97 –

2

1

2

1

3.5

0.5±

0.1

3.55 2.

9

0.62

±0.1

1.48

±0.1

Circuit diagram


1.2±0.11.7

1.35

0.6

–0.204.3

5.0±0.12.2±0.1

2.5±

0.1

0.4±

0.1

(2.8)

1,

2,

1,

2,

3.5

–0+0.2

2-φ0.7

1.48

±0.1

0.62

±0.1

2.9

3.55

1.7

0.5±

0.1

0.5

0.2

1.35

-0.2+04.3

0.6

1.8±

0.05

φ0.2

–0.1+0φ0.65

1.8±

0.1

(2.8)

Circuit diagram


0.4±

0.1

2.5±

0.1

2.2±0.15.0±0.1

1.2±0.1

2

1

2

1

1,

2,

1,

2,


No. 3


EVQP7B01K 2.2 N 1.35 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQP7K01K 1.6 N 1.35 mm Black 100000 cycles


EVQP7D01K 2.2 N 1.35 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQP7M01K 1.6 N 1.35 mm Black 100000 cycles

No. 4

EVQP7BEVQP7K

(Embossed Taping)

With J-bent ter mi nalsWithout boss

EVQP7DEVQP7M

(Embossed Taping)

With J-bent ter mi nalsWith boss

Oct. 201200



– ES98 –

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

through hall

Circuit diagram


1

2

1.7

0.5±

0.1

0.62

±0.1

3.55 2.

9

1.48

±0.1

3.9

1.35

4.73.5

’2

’2

’1

’1

2

1

(2.8)

φ0.6

+0.1

–0

2.2±0.14.05±0.15.5±0.1

0.4±

0.1

2.5±

0.1

0.8±

0.1

0.5±

0.1

0.62

±0.1

1.2±0.10.6

0.1 max.



Unit: mm


EVQP7, EVQP3EVQ9P7

1.35 5.2±0.2 4.5±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.3±0.1 1.5±0.2–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5

Unit: mm

Straight terminals, L-shape terminals type

J-bent type


EVQP3401K 2.2 N 1.35 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQ9P701K 1.6 N 1.35 mm Black 100000 cycles

No. 5


EVQP3EVQ9P

(Embossed Taping)

With L-shape terminalsWithout boss


EVQP7, EVQP3 1.35 4.5±0.2 4.5±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.3±0.1 1.5±0.2–0

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAN


– ES99 –

E V P A N

Product Code Characteristic Height

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Terminal TypeStraightL shape

7 thAE


Electrical






Mechanical


Push Travel 0.2 mm








Specifi cations

3.5 mm2.9 mm Side-operational Half Dive

/SMD Light Touch Switches

Type: EVPAN


Features External dimensions : 3.5 mm2.9 mm, Height 1.2 mm Printed circuit board on height : 0.7 mm High mount ability



Oct. 201200



– ES100 –

2

1

Circuit diagram

2.9

0.85

0.5

5.23.5

1.4 0.95

1.2±0.20.70±0.15

3.5

2.12

50.

8

2.9

1.55


5.5±0.1

3.1+0.10

3.0

+0.

10

0.3±

0.1

1.2±

0.1

0.9±

0.1

2.10

±0.0

5

0.77

5±0.

05

R0.5 max

3.55±0.10

1,

2,

2

1

1,

2,

2

1

Circuit diagram

2.9

0.85

0.4

0.5

0.6±

0.1

5.23.5

1.4 0.95

1.2±0.20.70±0.15

3.5

2.12

50.

8

2.9

4.6

1.55


5.7±0.1

3.1+0.10

φ0.7+0.10

4.7±0.1

3.0

+0.

10

1.2±

0.1

0.85

±0.1

2.10

±0.0

52.

25±0

.05

0.77

5±0.

05

R0.5 max

3.55±0.10

1,

2,

2

1

1,

2,


EVPANAA1A 1.6 N 0.7 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVPANDA1A 2.2 N 0.7 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVPANBA1A 1.6 N 0.7 mm Black 500000 cycles


EVPANDE1A 2.2 N 0.7 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVPANBE1A 1.6 N 0.7 mm Black 500000 cycles

EVPANAEVPAND

(Embossed Taping)

Straight terminals


EVPANDEVPANB

(Embossed Taping)

Straight terminals

Oct. 201200



– ES101 –

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

Recommended Solder Mask A

5.7±0.05

1.2±

0.05

0.85

±0.0

50.

775±

0.05

2.1±

0.05

3.55±0.05

Recommended Solder Mask B

Solder Mask B

5.7±0.05

4.7±0.050.2±0.05

1.2±

0.05

0.85

±0.0

50.

775±

0.05

2.1±

0.05

3.55±0.05



EVPAN 1.2 5.6±0.2 4.5±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.3±0.1 1.35±0.20_0

Unit: mm


Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0 1.0 ~ 3.0 1.0±0.5

Straight terminals


Recommended Solder Mask

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPU


– ES102 –

E

1

V

2

Q

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Type

7th & 8th02


9thK


P U 0 2 K

2.2 N

1.6 N

OperatingForce

TerminalType

StraightJ-bent

StraightJ-bent

6thWithout Boss

ABJK

With BossCDLM

Small-sized Side-operational SMD


Type: EVQPU

Specifi cations



Electrical






Mechanical

Operating Force 1.6 N+0.7 N 2.2 N+0.8 N









–0.2

–0.7–0.4

Features External dimensions : 4.7 mm3.5 mm, Height 1.65 mm A wide range of terminal type : J-bent, Straight



Oct. 201200



– ES103 –

1.65+0

.3–0

.1

6.44.7±0.1

4.5 3.5

1

2

3

4

2.6 1.4±0.1

0.6±

0.1

1.7±0

.1

3.7

1

2

3

4

6.8±0.1

0.7±0

.1

2.7±0

.1

3.7±0.1

0.2±

0.1

0.5

±0.1

φ0.2±0.1

φ0.65

2.75

±0.0

5

φ0.75 +0.1–0

+0–0.3

+0–0.2

2.75±

0.10

Circuit diagram


1.65+0

.30

–0.1

0

6.44.7±0.1

4.5 3.5

1

2

3

4

2.6 1.4±0.1

0.6±

0.1

1.7±0

.1

3.7

1

2

3

4

6.8±0.1

0.7±0

.1

2.7±0

.1

3.7±0.1

+0– 0.3

Circuit diagram



No. 1


EVQPUJ02K 1.6 N 1.65 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPUA02K 2.2 N 1.65 mm Black 100000 cycles


EVQPUL02K 1.6 N 1.65 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPUC02K 2.2 N 1.65 mm Black 100000 cycles

No. 2

EVQPUJEVQPUA

(Embossed Taping)

With straight terminalsWithout boss

EVQPULEVQPUC

(Embossed Taping)

With straight terminalsWith boss

Oct. 201200



– ES104 –

1.65+0

.3–0

.1

5.54.7±0.1

4.5 3.5

1

2

3

4

2.6 1.4±0.1

1

2

3

4

0.6±

0.1

1.7±0

.1

3.7

6.6±0.1

0.7±0

.1

2.7±0

.1

3.7±0.1

+0– 0.3

Circuit diagram


5.54.7±0.1

4.5 3.5

1

2

3

4

2.6 1.4±0.1

1

2

3

41.65+0

.3–0

.1

0.2±

0.1

0.5

±0.1

φ0.2±0.1

0.6±

0.1

2.75

±0.1

0

1.7±0

.1

3.7

φ0.65 +0– 0.2

6.6±0.1

0.7±0

.1

2.7±0

.1

3.7±0.1

2.75

±0.0

5

φ0.75

+0– 0.3

+0.1– 0

Circuit diagram



No. 3


EVQPUK02K 1.6 N 1.65 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPUB02K 2.2 N 1.65 mm Black 100000 cycles


EVQPUM02K 1.6 N 1.65 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPUD02K 2.2 N 1.65 mm Black 100000 cycles

No. 4

EVQPUKEVQPUB

(Embossed Taping)

With J-bent terminalsWithout boss

EVQPUMEVQPUD

(Embossed Taping)

With J-bent terminalsWith boss

Oct. 201200



– ES105 –

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.




Unit: mm


EVQPU 1.65 7.0±0.2 5.75±0.20 12.0±0.3 5.78±0.20 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.35±0.05 2.4±0.2–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ370.0±2.0 φ50.0 min. φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 14.0±1.5 — 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAV


– ES106 –

1

E

2

V

3

P

4 5 6 7 8 9

A V

Product Code Type

Features External dimensions : 2.8 mm2.3 mm (Excluding the

push plate), Height 1.95 mm (Printed circuit boardbeing as low as 0.975 mm)

Improved soldering strength in the operating direction

Specifi cations


(Mobile phones, Digital still cameras, Camcorders Portable audio players, etc.)


2.8 mm2.3 mm Side-operational Edge Mount

Light Touch Switch es

Type:EVPAV


Electrical






Mechanical

Operating Force 1.6 N

Push Travel 0.13 mm

Push Strength 50 N (15 seconds)







Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAV


– ES107 –

General dimension tolerance : ± 0.1( )dimensions are reference dimensions.This reference specifications are subject to change.

1

2

3

4

Circuit Diagram

1

2

3

4

1 These dimensions arefrom the outer shapeto the center of push plate.

2 These dimensions arefrom the center of datum A.

This product is designed to be smallerthan the conventional type, which loweredthe film peel off strength. Therefore pleaseavoid to apply force to a push plate fromside, or/and avoid set-knob to touch pushplate during insertion to a set-case.

Soldering thickness t=0.1±0.02

(1.6

3)1.

95

2)

1.00

±0.0

8

2)1.

00±0

.08

1.93

±0.1

50.

3

0.65

0.65

(0.9

8)

2.8A

(φ0.75) φ0.6

2.3±0.20.9

(2.8)(1.88)

0.65±0.15

2.00±0.15

1.50±0.05


Push plate side

Push plateAdhesive

0.97

5±0.

200

1)

0.97

5±0.

200

0.45

±0.0

5

0.65

±0.0

50.

40±0

.05

1.42

±0.0

5

0.92±0.053.20±0.05

1)1.4±0.2

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.

G

FA

B

E

C

D

Taping condition : Lack of products in the middle of taping should beone MAX, but total quantity specified in thespecifications should be secured.

Peeling off strength of top tape : It should be within 0.2N to 1. ON at165 degree in peeling off angle.

Joint of carrier tape : One joint per one reel may exist.

Tape running direction

F

C

J

Kt

H

A L

φG

D EB I

Tape width=8.0 mm

Feeding holeChippocket


EVPAV

Height from surface of PCB : 0.975 mm



Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item F G

Rate (mm) 9.4±1.0 13.4±1.0

Unit: mm

Part No. Height A B C D E F G H I J K L t

EVPAV 1.95 8.0±0.3 1.75±0.10 3.5±0.1 4.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 3.1±0.2 2.8±0.2 1.35±0.20 2.7±0.2 (6.25) 0.3±0.1 0

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAE


– ES108 –

1

E

2

V

3

P

4 5 6 7 8 9

A E


Features External dimensions : 4.5 mm2.25 mm (Excluding

the push plate), Height 2.9 mm (Printed circuit boardbeing as low as 0.95 mm)

Improved soldering strength in the operating direction Long operational life Measure against electro static discharge(ESD)

Specifi cations






Type:EVPAE


Electrical






Mechanical


Push Travel 0.15 mm








Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAE


– ES109 –

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

1 2 1' 1'21

Circuit Diagram

1 2 1'

1.5

2.9

4.52.2

3.3

3.6

4.8

1.7

2.2

2.6

2-0.6±0.1

1.65

±0.1

1.35

±0.1

1±0.

15.6±0.1

3.8

3.1±0.1

R0.3 max.

1.5±0.1

0.8±0.1

0.3±

0.1

0.4

max

.(0.

3tpy

)2-0.25 max.

2-0.25 max. (0.2tpy)

R0.3 to R0.5

0.4

max

.(0

.3tp

y)

0.6±0.1

(2.3)

Dimensions for reference

0+0.1

0.08

0+

00.7

0–0

.05

+00

.80.95

0.55

–0.1

0+

00.5


Note : Please put your considerationnot to let any burrs of printedwiring board stick out fromthe mounting surface of our switches.

Push plate side

–0+0.2

–0.1+0.08

–0.1

+0.

2

–0.1

+0.

2




Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0 — —


EVPAE 2.9 5.5±0.2 2.9±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.3±0.1 3.3±0.20 0

Unit: mm


EVPAEBB2A 1.6 N 0.95 mm Black 200000 cycles

EVPAEDB2A 3.0 N 0.95 mm Black 200000 cycles

EVPAE


Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQP4


– ES110 –

1

E

2

V

3

Q

4 5 6 7 8 9

P 4

Product Code Type Height Push Plate Color

Features External dimensions : 6.2 mm2.55 mm (Excluding

the push plate), Height 3.5 mm (EVQP4 Type : Printed circuit board being as low as 1.35 mm)

Side-operational middle stroke type ( 0.7 mm ) with a high operating force (5.0 N) Improved soldering strength in the operating direction when mounted on PC board edge

Specifi cations



Keyless entry (car electronics) Car audio equipment




Type:EVQP4

Travel Type Middle Push Travel Short Push Travel


Electrical






Mechanical

Operating Force 2.5 N, 3.5 N, 5.0 N 1.0 N, 1.6 N, 2.4 N, 3.5 N

Travel 0.70 mm±0.2 mm 0.25 mm –0.15 mm


Endurance Operating Life 2.5 N:1000000 cycles min.



1.0 N, 1.6 N: 1000000 cycles min.








+0.05

Oct. 201200



– ES111 –

3.4

+0.

2

2.5

+0.

2_ 0

.1

φ1.8

1 2 P.W.B.

0.3 max.

3.1±

0.1

6.0±0.1

7.0±0.15.8±0.1

0.45

±0.1

1.65

±0.1

1.25

±0.1

0.05 max.R0.5

max.

2.05

±0.1

0.3

max

.0.

1m

ax.

3.1±0.13.5

+0.

2_ 0

.1

0.4±

0.2

1.

35±0

.1

4.8±0.1

2.7±0.1

2.55

5.7±0.16.2+0.4_0

_ 0.1

1 2

Circuit diagram


5.1+0.1_0

6.2 +0.4_0

5.7±0.1

2.1+

0.2

_ 0.1

2.55

2.7±0.1

3.0

+0.

2_ 0

.1

φ2

4.8±0.12.6

1.6

1.

35±0

.1

0.4±

0.2

3.5

+0.

2_ 0

.1

3.1±0.1

0.1

max

.0.

3m

ax.

2.05

±0.1

R0.5max.

0.05 max.

1.25

±0.1

1.65

±0.1

0.45

±0.1

5.8±0.17.0±0.1

6.0±0.1

3.1±

0.1

0.3 max.

P.W.B.

1 2

Circuit diagram


1 2

5.1+0.1_0


No. 1


EVQP4HB3B 2.5 N 3.5 mm Blue 1000000 cycles

EVQP4KB3Q 3.5 N 3.5 mm Grey 500000 cycles

EVQP4MB3K 5.0 N 3.5 mm Black 200000 cycles


EVQP40B3M 1.0 N 3.5 mm Natural 1000000 cycles




No. 2

EVQP4

Middle push travel

EVQP4

Short push travel



Oct. 201200



– ES112 –

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.



Unit: mm


EVQP4 3.5 6.5±0.2 3.9±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.4±0.1 3.75±0.20–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ370.0±2.0 φ50.0 min. φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 14.0±1.5 — 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPS


– ES113 –

E

1

Type

J-bent

StraightJ-bent

Straight

1.6 N

2.2 N

V

2

Q

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Without BossC

L

GQ

With BossDM

HR

P 0 2 KS

Embossed Taping6th 7th & 8th

029thK


Height1.8 mm

TerminalShape

OperatingForce

6.1 mm4.0 mm Side-operational SMD


Type: EVQPS

Specifi cations

Features External dimensions : 6.1 mm4.0 mm, Height 1.8 mm Terminal shapes : straight, J-bent


–0.4 –0.7


Electrical

Rating 10 µA 2 Vdc to 50 mA 12 Vdc (Resistiv load)





Mechanical

Operating Force 1.6 N+0.7 N 2.2 N+0.8 N


Push Strength 30 N for 1 minute







–0.2


Oct. 201200



– ES114 –

7.4

4.6

4.0

1.6

1.4

2.4

1.5 0.5

6.1

3.4±0.20.5

1.5±

0.2

φ0.9+0.2

3.0±0.1

–0

3.0±0.05

4.4

2.4

5.6

3.0

A B

A' B'

φ0.8

+0.

1–0

.2

1.80.6

C0.3

0.6

(3)

A B

A' B'

PWB land pattern for reference(Tolerance:±0.1)

Circuit Diagram

7.4

6.0

4.0

1.6

1.4

2.4

1.5 0.5

6.1

3.0±0.1

1.5±

0.2

5.8

1.5

A B

A' B'

1.8 0.6A B

A' B'

1.4

0.5

φ0.8

+0.

1–0

.2

C0.3

(3)

φ0.9+0.2–0

3.0±0.05

3.4±0.2

3.4


Circuit Diagram


No. 1


EVQPSD02K 1.6 N 1.8 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPSH02K 2.2 N 1.8 mm Black 100000 cycles


EVQPSM02K 1.6 N 1.8 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPSR02K 2.2 N 1.8 mm Black 100000 cycles

No. 2

EVQPSDEVQPSH

J-bent terminals,with Boss

EVQPSMEVQPSR

Straight terminals,with Boss

Oct. 201200



– ES115 –

7.4

4.6

4.0

1.6

1.4

2.4

1.5 0.5

6.1

3.4±0.2

1.5±

0.2

4.4

2.4

5.6

3.0

A B

A' B'

1.80.6 0.6

(3)

A B

A' B'


Circuit Diagram

7.4

6.0

4.0

1.6

1.4

2.4

1.5 0.5

6.1

1.5±

0.2

1.8 0.6A B

A' B'

(3)

3.4±0.2

5.8

A B

A' B'

1.4

1.5

3.4


Circuit Diagram


No. 3


EVQPSC02K 1.6 N 1.8 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPSG02K 2.2 N 1.8 mm Black 100000 cycles


EVQPSL02K 1.6 N 1.8 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPSQ02K 2.2 N 1.8 mm Black 100000 cycles

No. 4

EVQPSCEVQPSG

J-bent terminals,without Boss

EVQPSLEVQPSQ

Straight terminals,without Boss

Oct. 201200



– ES116 –

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=16.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.




Unit: mm


EVQPS 1.8 6.8±0.2 8.0±0.2 16.0±0.3 7.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.30±0.05 2.7±0.2–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ370.0±2.0 φ50.0 min. φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 18.0±1.5 — 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPA/PB


– ES117 –

A

A'

B

B'

E

1

V

2

Q P BA

3 4 5 6 7 8

Height

9

Push Plate ColorProduct Code Type

5N Type Light Touch Switches

Type: EVQPA/EVQPB

Features Wealth of product types: With or without a ground terminal,

vertical type, snap-in terminals, etc. Can be automatically dip-soldered: Integral molding of

the terminals and main body prevents the escape of fl ux.


Product Chart =In production

OperatingForce

Positioning Pin Ground TerminalHeight

4.3 mm 5.0 mm 7.0 mm 9.5 mm

1.0 N Without positioning pinWith ground terminal

Without ground terminal







Specifi cations


Electrical

Circuit Diagram







1.0 N±0.4 N1.3 N±0.4 N1.6 N±0.5 N

2.6 N±0.6 N






Top-push 500 pcs. Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)

Quantity/Carton Top-push 10000 pcs. 1 million cycles also available, consult our salesmen.


Oct. 201200



– ES118 –

A B

A' B'

6.0±0.3

6.0±

0.3

φ3.6

4.5

3.4H

3.5±0.5 0.7

6.5


View from mounting side

0.5 max.

(6.5

)(7

.8)

4-φ1.0 0.10

+–



EVQPAC04M 1.0 N 4.3 mm White 100000 cycles

EVQPAC05R 1.0 N 5.0 mm Red 100000 cycles

EVQPAC07K 1.0 N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPAC09K 1.0 N 9.5 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPAD04M 1.3 N 4.3 mm White 100000 cycles

EVQPAD05R 1.3 N 5.0 mm Red 100000 cycles

EVQPAD07K 1.3 N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPAD09K 1.3 N 9.5 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPAE04M 1.6 N 4.3 mm White 100000 cycles

EVQPAE05R 1.6 N 5.0 mm Red 100000 cycles

EVQPAE07K 1.6 N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPAE09K 1.6 N 9.5 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPAG04M 2.6 N 4.3 mm White 50000 cycles

EVQPAG05R 2.6 N 5.0 mm Red 50000 cycles

EVQPAG07K 2.6 N 7.0 mm Black 50000 cycles

EVQPAG09K 2.6 N 9.5 mm Black 50000 cycles

EVQPA

Without ground ter mi nal

No. 1

Oct. 201200



– ES119 –

A B

A' B'

6.0±0.3

6.0±

0.3

φ3.6

4.5

3.4H

3.5 0.7

6.5

0.7

1.5



0.5 max.

4.1+–

0.10

(7.8

)(6

.5)

5-φ1.0 0.10

+–



EVQPBC04M 1.0 N 4.3 mm White 100000 cycles

EVQPBC05R 1.0 N 5.0 mm Red 100000 cycles

EVQPBC07K 1.0 N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPBC09K 1.0 N 9.5 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPBD04M 1.3 N 4.3 mm White 100000 cycles

EVQPBD05R 1.3 N 5.0 mm Red 100000 cycles

EVQPBD07K 1.3 N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPBD09K 1.3 N 9.5 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPBE04M 1.6 N 4.3 mm White 100000 cycles

EVQPBE05R 1.6 N 5.0 mm Red 100000 cycles

EVQPBE07K 1.6 N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPBE09K 1.6 N 9.5 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPBG04M 2.6 N 4.3 mm White 50000 cycles

EVQPBG05R 2.6 N 5.0 mm Red 50000 cycles

EVQPBG07K 2.6 N 7.0 mm Black 50000 cycles

EVQPBG09K 2.6 N 9.5 mm Black 50000 cycles

EVQPB

With ground terminal

No. 2

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPF


– ES120 –

E

1

V

2

Q P F

3 4 5 6 7 8

Height

9


A B

5N Type Side-operational Light Touch Switches

Type: EVQPF



Specifi cations


Electrical

Circuit Diagram







1.0 N±0.4 N1.3 N±0.4 N1.6 N±0.5 N

2.6 N±0.6 N






Top-push 500 pcs. Polyethylene Bag (Bulk)


Features Wealth of product types: Horizontal type,

snap-in terminals, etc. Can be automatically dip-soldered: Integral molding of


Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPF


– ES121 –

7.56.2 0.

37.

13.

54.

00.4 0.7

4.57.0±0.5 k

3.5

0.3

0.5 max.

1.0

φ3.6

1.0

2.54.0

7.0±0.1

4.5±0.1

2.5±

0.1

2-φ1.3+0.1–0

2-φ1.0+0.1–0

A BPWB mounting hole for reference

(PWB thickness=1.6 mm)View from mounting side

Circuit diagram


Part Numbers Operating Force k =Push Plate Place Push Plate Color Operating Life

EVQPF003M 1.0 N 3.15 mm White 100000 cycles

EVQPF004R 1.0 N 3.85 mm Red 100000 cycles

EVQPF006K 1.0 N 5.85 mm Black 100000 cycles














EVQPF

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQ2


– ES122 –

A

A'

B

B'

E

1

V

2

Q 2

3 4 5 6 7 8

Height

9


5N Type 2R Light Touch Switches

Type: EVQ2

Product Chart =Standard

OperatingForce

Positioning Pin Ground TerminalHeight

4.3 mm 5.0 mm 7.0 mm 9.5 mm









Specifi cations


Electrical

Circuit Diagram







1.0 N±0.4 N1.3 N±0.4 N1.6 N±0.5 N

2.6 N±0.6 N






Top-push 1000 pcs. Radial Taping (Reel Pack)


Recommended Applications Operating switches for electronic equipment


Features Wealth of product types: With or without a ground terminal,

vertical type, snap-in terminals, etc. Can be automatically dip-soldered: Integral molding of


Oct. 201200



– ES123 –

A B

AB

P Q

6.0±0.3

6.0±

0.3

φ3.6

2-φ1.00±0.05

φ4.0±0.3

0.3 max.

0.5

max

.

3.4 0.9

H

Circuitdiagram

5.0



JIS C0806-2 shall be applied to the itemsnot specified here.

1.0 max.1.0 max.

0.3

12.7±1.0

12.7±0.3

0.80.6

0.53.85±0.70

18.0

+1.

0–0

5.0+0.8–0.2

18.0

+1.

0–0

.5

1.3 max.1.3 max. 1.

5m

ax.

0.6±

0.3

E E'

6.35±0.70

6.0±

0.5

9.0±

0.5

Adhesive tape

Adhesive tape shallnot extend beyondbase paper.

P QThe direction of or side is randomly settled.

2.0

max

.

E-E' Section



EVQ21304M 1.0 N 4.3 mm White 100000 cycles

EVQ21305R 1.0 N 5.0 mm Red 100000 cycles

EVQ21307K 1.0 N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cycles














EVQ2

With ground terminal

2-terminals typeWithout ground terminal

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPC


– ES124 –

E

1

V

2

Q P C

3 4 5 6 7 8

Height

9


A B

5N Type Side-operational 4R Light Touch Switches

Type: EVQPC



Specifi cations


Electrical

Circuit Diagram







1.0 N±0.4 N1.3 N±0.4 N1.6 N±0.5 N

2.6 N±0.6 N





Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit 700 pcs. Radial Taping (Reel Pack)


1 million cycles also available, consult our salesmen.

Features Wealth of product types: Horizontal type,

snap-in terminals, etc. Can be automatically dip-soldered: Integral molding of


Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPC


– ES125 –

A B

A B

2-φ1.30±0.05

2-φ1.00±0.05

5.0±0.1

7.0±0.1

φ4.0±0.212.7±0.2

18.0

+1.

0–0

.5

0.4±0.2

7.0±0.3

3.85±0.700.50+0.15–0.10

5.0+0.8–0.2

2.0±0.2

7.5±0.36.35±0.70 12.7±1.0

6.2±0.2

0.3

max

.

0.3

max

.

7.1±

0.2

4.0±

0.3

3.0±

0.2

2.0

max

.

17.0

±0.5

27.1

±1.0

4.0±

0.3

6.0±

0.5

9.0±

0.5

20.0

( Ho)

±0.5

0.3±0.24.75±0.25

2.3±0.2

2.0 max.2.0 max.4.

0±0.

1

φ3.5±0.2φ3.3±0.2

9.25±0.30

1.0±0.2

4.0±0.32.5±0.2

0.5 max.



Circuit diagram


Part Numbers Operating Force Push Plate Place Push Plate Color Operating Life Insert Ma chine H0 Dimension

EVQPC005K 1.0 N 4.75 mm Black 100000 cycles Panasert 20 mm




EVQPC405K 1.0 N 4.75 mm Black 100000 cycles Avisert 21 mm

EVQPCP05K 1.3 N 4.75 mm Black 100000 cycles Avisert 21 mm



EVQPC

Oct. 201200



– ES126 –

A B

E V Q 1 1


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Push Plate Color

Specifi cations


Electrical

Circuit Diagram


Contact Resistance 50 mΩ max.

Insulation Resistance 50 MΩ min. (at 100 Vdc)




1.0 N±0.4 N1.3 N±0.4 N1.6 N±0.5 N

2.6 N±0.6 N







1 million cycles also available, consult our salesmen.

Round Type 2R Light Touch Switches

Type: EVQ11

Features External dimensions : 6.0 mm6.0 mm, Height 3.9 mm (Excluding the push plate) The cast-processed terminals improve the mountability



Oct. 201200



– ES127 –

PWB mounting hole for referenceView from mounting side

6.0

R3.2

0.5

max

.φ3.6

0.2 max.

5.0±

0.1

2-φ1.00±0.05

H3.

4

A B

P

1.0 max.1.0 max.

Q

0.3

18.0

+1.

00

(11.

4)(8

.9)

AB

1.3 max.1.3 max.

12.7±1.0

0.8

(3.8

)(1

.1)

6.35±0.70 12.7±0.3

φ4.0±0.3

6.0±

0.5

9.0±

0.5

18.0

+1.

0–0

.5

2.0

max

.

0.6±

0.3

1.5

max

.

5.0+0.8–0.2 3.85±0.70

E E'

Circuit diagram


Adhesive tape

E-E' section

QPThe direction of or side is randomly settled.

JIS C0806-2 shall be applied to the itemsnot specified here.


Part Numbers Operating Force H=Height Push Plate Color Operating LifeEVQ11A04M 1.0N 4.3 mm White 100000 cyclesEVQ11A05R 1.0N 5.0 mm Red 100000 cyclesEVQ11A07K 1.0N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cyclesEVQ11A09K 1.0N 9.5 mm Black 100000 cyclesEVQ11D04K 1.0N 4.3 mm Black 1000000 cyclesEVQ11D05B 1.0N 5.0 mm Blue 1000000 cyclesEVQ11D07K 1.0N 7.0 mm Black 1000000 cyclesEVQ11D09K 1.0N 9.5 mm Black 1000000 cyclesEVQ11G04M 1.3N 4.3 mm White 100000 cyclesEVQ11G05R 1.3N 5.0 mm Red 100000 cyclesEVQ11G07K 1.3N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cyclesEVQ11G09K 1.3N 9.5 mm Black 100000 cyclesEVQ11K04K 1.3N 4.3 mm Black 1000000 cyclesEVQ11K05B 1.3N 5.0 mm Blue 1000000 cyclesEVQ11K07K 1.3N 7.0 mm Black 1000000 cyclesEVQ11K09K 1.3N 9.5 mm Black 1000000 cyclesEVQ11L04M 1.6N 4.3 mm White 100000 cyclesEVQ11L05R 1.6N 5.0 mm Red 100000 cyclesEVQ11L07K 1.6N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cyclesEVQ11L09K 1.6N 9.5 mm Black 100000 cyclesEVQ11Y04K 1.6N 4.3 mm Black 1000000 cyclesEVQ11Y05B 1.6N 5.0 mm Blue 1000000 cyclesEVQ11Y07K 1.6N 7.0 mm Black 1000000 cyclesEVQ11Y09K 1.6N 9.5 mm Black 1000000 cyclesEVQ11U04M 2.6N 4.3 mm White 50000 cyclesEVQ11U05R 2.6N 5.0 mm Red 50000 cyclesEVQ11U07K 2.6N 7.0 mm Black 50000 cyclesEVQ11U09K 2.6N 9.5 mm Black 50000 cyclesEVQ11V04K 2.6N 4.3 mm Black 100000 cyclesEVQ11V05B 2.6N 5.0 mm Blue 100000 cyclesEVQ11V07K 2.6N 7.0 mm Black 100000 cyclesEVQ11V09K 2.6N 9.5 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQ11

(Radial Taping)

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPE


– ES128 –

E V Q P E


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


A B

6.0 mm3.5 mm Light Touch Switch es

Type: EVQPE

Features External dimensions : 6.0 mm3.5 mm, Height 4.3 mm, 5.0 mm Wave soldering available



Product ChartType

Operating Force Bulk Type Height

1.0 N±0.5 N EVQPE4H=4.3 mm

H=5.0 mm 1.6 N±0.5 N EVQPE5

2.4 N±0.6 N EVQPE6

Specifi cations

–0.10


Electrical

Circuit Diagram







1.0 N±0.5N

(Low force type)

1.6 N±0.5 N

(Standard)

2.4 N±0.6 N







Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPE


– ES129 –

3.5±0.5

1.0±0.21.4

A

A

B

B

6.0

3.0

Circuit diagram

( 2.6

)

0.5 max.3.5

H 3.5±0.5

6.5 2-φ1

.30±

0.05



(6.5

)

(7.9

)



EVQPE404Q 1.0 N 4.3 mm Grey 50000 cycles

EVQPE405Q 1.0 N 5.0 mm Grey 50000 cycles



EVQPE604T 2.4 N 4.3 mm Brown 30000 cycles

EVQPE605T 2.4 N 5.0 mm Brown 30000 cycles

EVQPE4EVQPE5EVQPE6

(Bulk)

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPJ


– ES130 –

A B

E V Q P J


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9


6.0 mm3.5 mm 2R Light Touch Switch es

Type: EVQPJ


Product Chart

Type

Operating ForceRadial Taping Height

1.0 N±0.5 N EVQPJGH=4.3 mm

H=5.0 mm 1.6 N±0.5 N EVQPJH

2.4 N±0.6 N EVQPJJ

Specifi cations

–0.10


Electrical

Circuit Diagram







1.0 N±0.5N(Low force type)

1.6 N±0.5 N(Standard)

2.4 N±0.6 N







Features External dimensions : 6.0 mm3.5 mm, Height 4.3 mm, 5.0 mm Wave soldering available


Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPJ


– ES131 –

A B

AB

Circuit diagram

Cross section E-E'

3.5±0.5

3.0

3.4

4.0

( 2.0

)5.

0

1.1

6.0

1.0 max.1.0 max.

1.3 max.1.3 max.

1.5

max

.

6.0±

0.5

9.0±

0.5

0.6±

0.312.7±1.0

E E'

3.85±0.70

12.7±0.36.35±0.70



5.0

2-φ0.95±0.05

0.3

18.0

+1.

00

18.0

+1.

0–0

.5

5.0+0.8–0.2

0.80.5 Adhesive tape shall not extend beyond

base paper.

JIS C0806-2 shall be applied to the items not specified here.

Adhesive tape

φ4.0±0.3

90±3°

2.0

max

.

H



EVQPJG04Q 1.0 N 4.3 mm Grey 50000 cycles

EVQPJG05Q 1.0 N 5.0 mm Grey 50000 cycles

EVQPJH04K 1.6 N 4.3 mm Black 50000 cycles

EVQPJH05K 1.6 N 5.0 mm Black 50000 cycles

EVQPJJ04T 2.4 N 4.3 mm Brown 30000 cycles

EVQPJJ05T 2.4 N 5.0 mm Brown 30000 cycles

EVQPJGEVQPJHEVQPJJ

(Radial Taping)

Oct. 201200



– ES132 –

Force

Push Travel

OF

MDPT OT

RF

E

1

V

2

Q

3

P

4

0

5 6

0

7

7

8

K

9

Type

6thED

Operating Force 7th & 8th07


9thK

Push Plate ColorBlack0.74 N

1.30 N


Electrical


Contact Resistance 100 m max. (1 max. after life test)



Bouncing 3 ms max. (ON), 8 ms max. (OFF)

Mechanical

Operating Force EVQP0E : 0.74 N max. EVQP0D : 1.3 N max.

Returning Force 0.1 N min.

Pre-travel 0.5 mm max.

Movement Differential (MD) 0.12 mm max.

Over Travel 0.2 mm max.

Endurance Operating Life EVQP0E : 5000000 cycles min. EVQP0D : 1000000 cycles min.


Storage Temperature –45 °C to +85 °C



Specifi cations

Over Travel Light Touch Switches

Type: EVQP0


Features External dimensions : 6.2 mm6.2 mm, Height 7.45 mm Comfortable for long-time operation due to over-travel Excellent light-touch operational feel

Recommended Applications Operating switches for other electronic equipment Operation switches for PC mouse

Oct. 201200



– ES133 –

Circuit diagram

A B

6.2±0.1

φ3.06.2±

0.1

7.45

max

.7.

0±0.

2

3.5±

0.2

Ret

urni

ngP

ositi

onO

per

atin

gP

ositi

on 0.3 max

0.9 6.

7

0.8±0.1

2.5

0.3±0.1

5.08±0.20

0.75

1.8

A B

R0.5

3.0

3.0

4.0

5.0±

0.1

2-φ1.00±0.05




EVQP0E07K 0.74 N 7.45 mm Black 5000000 cycles

EVQP0D07K 1.30 N 7.45 mm Black 1000000 cycles

EVQP0

(Bulk)

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAH


– ES134 –


E

1

V

2

P A H

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ABC

1st0.8 N0.9 N1.0 N

2nd1.6 N2.0 N2.6 N

Operating Force Terminal TypeJ-bent

6thG7th Positioning Boss

Without

Specifi cations

Type Snap action/Push-on type SPDT

Electrical





Bouncing 3 ms max. (ON), 20 ms max. (OFF)


1st : 0.8 N, 0.9 N, 1.0 N

2nd : 1.6 N, 2.0 N, 2.6 N

Travel 1st: 0.15 mm 2nd: 0.3 mm

Endurance Operating Life

1.6 N : 100000 cycles min.

2.0 N : 100000 cycles min.

2.6 N : 30000 cycles min.


Storage Temperature –40 °C to +85 °C (Bulk)




4 mm Square Double-action SMD


Type: EVPAH


Features External dimensions : 4.0 mm4.1 mm, Height 0.59 mm Long operation life Wide selection of double action operating variations

Recommended Applications Camera function (Digital still cameras, Camcorders,

Mobile phones, etc.) for shutter switches.

Oct. 201200



– ES135 –

0.59

0.25

2.7

0.75

1.2

3.44.8

(0.63)

0.5

0.5

0.5

1.9

0.35

φ3.3

+0.1–0.32-4.25

+0.3–0.14.55

B

(3.4)

B’

D

B B’D

C C’

A

C C’

A

4

4.1

0.2

C or/and C’ shall be usedas common/ground terminal.

Circuit Diagram

(Washer)

D terminalGround terminal (Washer to D terminal)

Washer

PWB land pattern for reference(View from mounting side)

+0.3–0.1

B B’

C C’

A

Please do not Provide anyLand pattern in this area.

(2.8

)

(2.7)

D

2nd operation

1st operation


Part Numbers Boss Ground TerminalOperating Force

Height Operating Life1 th 2 th

EVPAHAG6A Without With 0.8 N 1.6 N 0.59 100000 cycles

EVPAHBG6A Without With 0.9 N 2.0 N 0.59 100000 cycles

EVPAHCG6A Without With 1.0 N 2.6 N 0.59 30000 cycles

EVPAH


Oct. 201200



– ES136 –

0.3 mm max.

Switch

Mounting surface

Test pole


(vertical direction)φ1.2

R0.05

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.




Unit: mm


EVPAH 0.59 4.36±0.2 4.4±0.2 12.0+0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.1 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.3±0.05 1.25+0.2

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5


–0.1 –0 –0.1

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQPR/Q0/3PR


– ES137 –

E

1

V

2

Q

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

4th, 5th, 6thPRB, Q04PR7, 3PRPR5, PRDPR9, PRH

Ground TerminalWithoutWithout

WithWith

BossWithout

WithWithout

With

7th, 8th, 9thA10A09

Push PlateWith

Without

Specifi cations


Push Plate type With Push Plate Without Push Plate

Electrical



Insulation Resistance 50 M min.




1st : 0.7 N 1st : 1.0 N

2nd : 2.6 N 2nd : 2.6 N

Travel 1st: 0.4 mm 2nd: 0.6 mm







6 mm Square Thin Type Double-action SMD


Type: EVQPR/EVQQ0/EVQ3PR


Features External dimensions : 6.0 mm6.0 mm, Height : 0.9 mm (Without push plate) 0.95 mm (With push plate) Wide selection of double action operating variations With push plate : 1st 0.7 N, 2nd 2.6 N Without push plate : 1st 1.0 N, 2nd 2.6 N Wide selection of double action operating variations

Recommended Applications Camera function (Digital still cameras, Camcorders, Mobile phones, etc.) Operating switches for menu scrolling and confi rmation

for portable equipment.

Oct. 201200



– ES138 –

Gold plate

C

D

C A B D

DBAC

C A B D

Dummy

Dummy

Dummy

B

6.0

B C

2.1±

0.1

1.1±

0.1

1.8±

0.1

0.8±

0.1

3.6±

0.1

1.6±

0.1

7.4±0.14.8±0.1

(5.0)

1.3

1.6

A

1.3

1.3

0.4

0.6

1.0

C0.1

0.05±0.05

2.4±0.13.7±0.1

0.8±0.

1

+0.05

–0φ1.05

+0.05–0.1φ0.8

1

1

+0.0

5–0

φ0.8

51.00

±0.05

1.00±0.05

1.2

1.2

φ1.0

+0.

05–0

.1

1.2±

0.05

1.20±0.05A D

1.2

0.5

1.01.2

φ2.5

φ0.8

φ0.5

6.05.7

1.05±0.1

0.95±0.2

Circuit diagram PWB land pattern for reference(View from mounting side)

E F

Recommended solderthickness t=0.15±0.03

Either E or F type will be used becauseof variety of molding dies.

(Day)

(Year)

(Month)

OFF

1st Action

2nd Action

φ3.5

Gold plate

C

D

2nd Action

1st Action

Dummy

C A B D

DBAC

C A B D

Dummy

Dummy

Dummy

B

6.0

5.76.0

B C

2.1±

0.1

1.1±

0.1

1.8±

0.1

0.8±

0.1

3.6±

0.1

1.6±

0.1

7.4±0.14.8±0.1

(5.0)

1.3

1.6

A

1.3

1.3

0.4

0.6

0.9

1.0

1.0

C0.1

0.05±0.05

2.4±0.13.7±0.1

0.8±

0.1

+0.05–0

φ1.05

+0.05–0.1φ0.8

1.0

1.0

+0.0

5–0

φ0.8

51.0

0±0.0

5

1.2

1.2

+0.

05–0

.1φ1

(Day)

(Year)

φ0.5

(Month)

1.2±

0.05

1.20±0.05A D

1.2

1.2

0.5

0.6


Circuit diagram

1.00±0.05

EF

Either E or F type will be used becauseof variety of molding dies.

Recommended solderthickness t=0.15±0.03

No. 1


Part Numbers Ground Terminal Boss Operating Force Height Operating LifeEVQQ04A10 Without Without 1st/0.7 N, 2nd/2.6 N 0.95 mm 30000 cyclesEVQPR7A10 Without With 1st/0.7 N, 2nd/2.6 N 0.95 mm 30000 cyclesEVQPR5A10 With Without 1st/0.7 N, 2nd/2.6 N 0.95 mm 30000 cyclesEVQPR9A10 With With 1st/0.7 N, 2nd/2.6 N 0.95 mm 30000 cycles

Part Numbers Ground Terminal Boss Operating Force Height Operating LifeEVQPRBA09 Without Without 1st/1.0 N, 2nd/2.6 N 0.9 mm 30000 cyclesEVQ3PRA09 Without With 1st/1.0 N, 2nd/2.6 N 0.9 mm 30000 cyclesEVQPRDA09 With Without 1st/1.0 N, 2nd/2.6 N 0.9 mm 30000 cyclesEVQPRHA09 With With 1st/1.0 N, 2nd/2.6 N 0.9 mm 30000 cycles

No. 2

With Push Plate

EVQQ0EVQPR

(Mounting base with Boss)(With ground terminal)

Without Push Plate

EVQPREVQ3PR

(Mounting base with Boss)(With ground terminal)

Oct. 201200



– ES139 –

0.3 mm max.

Switch

Mounting surface

Test pole


(vertical direction)φ1.2

R0.05

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.




Unit: mm

–0.1


EVQPR/Q0/3PR 0.9, 0.95 6.3±0.3 6.3±0.3 12.0±0.3 5.50±0.15 1.75±0.15 8.00±0.15 2.00±0.15 4.00±0.15 1.5+0.1 0.30±0.05 1.7+0.2–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.2 φ21.0±0.8 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5


Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAJ


– ES140 –

E

1

V

2

P

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Product code Type Height

A J

Specifi cations





Dielectric Withstanding Volt age 250 Vac for 1 minute

Bouncing3 ms max. (ON)

20 ms max. (OFF)

Mechanical

Operating Force (1st Action) 1.6 N

Operating Force (2nd Action) 2.6 N

Travel (1st Action) 0.15 mm

Travel (2nd Action) 0.4 mm

Push Strength 30 N for 15 seconds







4.7 mm3.5 mm Double-action Side-operational

SMD Light Touch Switches

Type: EVPAJ


Features External dimensions : 4.7 mm3.5 mm (Without push

plate), Height : 1.2 mm With ground terminal



Oct. 201200



– ES141 –

A or/and A’ shall be usedas common/ground terminal.

Common/ground terminal

Circuit Diagram


PWB land pattern for reference(View from mounting side)Push plate side

4.5±

0.2

1.2±

0.15

5.8±0.2

3.5±0.1

0.6±

0.05

1.1±

0.05

2.9±

0.1

1.9

0.5

0.5

0.5

4.7±0.2

2.3 0.85

A

D

C

A'

B

C'3.5

–0.1

5+

0.20

AD

1st2nd

C

A'BC'

A

D

C

A'

B

C'

6.6±0.2

0.3

0.4

3±0.1

φ0.5

50+0

.1

5.9±0.16.9±0.1

A or/and A’ shall be usedas common/ground terminal.

Common/ground terminal

Circuit Diagram



Push plate side

4.5±

0.2

1.2±

0.15

6.6±0.2

3.5±0.1

0.6±

0.05

3±0.16.9±0.1

1.1±

0.05

2.9±

0.1

1.9

0.5

0.5

0.5

4.7±0.2

2.3 0.85

A

D

C

A'

B

C'3.5

–0.1

5+

0.20

AD

1st2nd

C

A'BC'

A

D

C

A'

B

C'


EVPAJ

L-shape

Part Nambers : EVPAJAE1A

EVPAJ

(Embossed Taping)With Ground Terminal

Part Nambers : EVPAJAC1A

Oct. 201200



– ES142 –

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.



Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0 – –


EVPAJ 1.2 6.8±0.2 4.9±0.2 12.0+0.3 5.78±0.1 1.75±0.1 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.3±0.05 1.95+0.3_0

Unit: mm

_0.1 _0

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQQ0


– ES143 –

E

1

V

2

Q

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Product code Type Height

Q 0

C A B D

C A B D

C A B D

OFF

1st Action

2nd Action

Specifi cations


Electrical

Circuit Diagram





Bouncing5 ms max. (ON)

20 ms max. (OFF)

Mechanical

Operating Force (1st Action) 1.0 N

Operating Force (2nd Action) 2.6 N

Travel (1st Action) 0.4 mm

Travel (2nd Action) 0.5 mm

Push Strength 30 N for 1 minute

Endurance Operating Life 1st Action with click : 200000 cycles min.






6.2 mm3.7 mm Double-action

Side-operational Edge Mount / SMD


Type: EVQQ0


Features External dimensions : 6.2 mm3.75 mm (Excluding the

push plate), Height : 3.5 mm (EVQQ0C Type : Printed circuit board being as low as 1.35 mm)

Good operability due to long stroke : 1st 0.4 mm, 2nd 0.5 mm Improved soldering strength in the operating direction when mounted on PC board edge



Oct. 201200



– ES144 –

PWB land pattern for reference(Tolerance : ±0.1)

41.61

4.3

3.25

2.85

2.5

0.45

7.25.8

–0+0.1

5.1

0.35 max.0.3 min.

0.25 max.

0.4

max

.

0.15

min

.

R1 max.

R1.32.

85

1.8

–0.1

+0.

23.

5

0.4

–0.0

5+

0.1

0

1.6

2.6–0

.1+

0.2

4.35

–0+0.56.2

–0.1

+0.

25.

25

3.75

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3

1.

35±0

.1(1.9

5)

5.7±0.1

1 2 3

φ2

4.8

(1.5

)

2.8±0.12-1±0.1 0.8±0.1

1.9

(1.8

5or

1.95

)

2nd Action

1st Action

OFF

P.W.B

Note : Please put your consideration not to let anyburrs of printed wiring board stick out fromthe mounting surface of our switches.

Circuit diagram

Y’

Y

X’X

Circuit daiagram

1 2 3

321

1 2 3

(0.9

)2-

3

0.67.1

5.32.8

P.W.B.

3-4.

753-

3.6

3-0.

3

3-11.6

4

PWB land pattern for reference(View from mounting side) (Tolerance : ±0.1)

1.95

Mounting SurfaceBetween portion A and B on washer.

1.6

(5)(4.4)

Between washer and terminals.(Initial condition : 0 to 0.1 mm)

0±0.

05

(Mou

nting

base

)

(Was

her)

0.05

±0.0

5

B

B

A

1.9

+0.

04-0

.15

(1.5

)

123

φ2

4.8C

2-1±0.1 0.8±0.12.8±0.15.7±0.1

1.35

±0.1

3.75

6.2+0.5–0

2.6

0.4

3.5

+0.

2–0

.1

1.8

2.85

4.35

+0.

2–0

.15.

25+

0.2

–0.1

Support

P.W.B.

2nd Action

1st Action

OFF



EVQQ0C03K 1st Action/1.0 N (With click)2nd Action/2.6 N 3.5 mm 200000 cycles


EVQQ0G03K 1st Action/1.0 N (With click)2nd Action/2.6 N 3.5 mm 200000 cycles

No. 1

No. 2


EVQQ0C0

(Embossed Taping)

EVQQ0G0

(Embossed Taping)

Oct. 201200



– ES145 –

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t



Unit: mm


EVQQ0CEVQQ0G

3.5 6.6±0.25.7±0.2

12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.4±0.13.8±0.2

5.8±0.2 3.7±0.2–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQP0/P1/9P


– ES146 –

E

1

V

2

Q

3 4

0 5 M

5 6 7 8 9

4th, 5th, 6thP1KP1YP19P1FP1DP049P1

Operating Force2.2 N2.5 N1.6 N2.0 N2.5 N3.0 N3.5 N

Travel

1.0 mm

1.3 mm

7th & 8th05

Height from Bottom to Knob Top5.0 mm

9thM

Push Plate ColorNatural

Specifi cations


Electrical







1.6 N±0.5 N, 2.0 N±0.6 N2.5 N±0.6 N3.0 N±0.8 N3.5 N±1.0 N

2.2 N±0.6 N2.5 N±0.6 N

Travel 1.3 mm±0.2 mm 1.0 mm±0.2 mm

Endurance Operating Life3.5 N type: 30000 cycles min.

1.6 N, 2.0 N, 2.2 N, 2.5 N, 3.0 N types: 100000 cycles min.






(Including the push plate) Steady and low contact resistance (100 mΩ max.) Excellent solderability (J-bent-type terminals)

6 mm Square Long Travel SMD


Type: EVQP0/EVQP1/EVQ9P


Recommended Applications Operating switches for car electronic equipment. Input on operating switches for telephones, electronic

musical instruments, etc.

Oct. 201200



– ES147 –


Circuit diagram

4.5±0.1

A'

A' B'

A B

B'

A B

6.1±

0.1

1.01.04.5±0.1

3.6

10.0

0.75

6.0 3.5H

(4.0

)

φ4.6

1.0±0.3

R0.2

7.4

0-

0.6


Part Numbers Operating Force Travel H=Height Push Plate Color Operating Life

EVQP1K05M 2.2 N 1.0 mm 5.0 mm Natural 100000 cycles

EVQP1Y05M 2.5 N 1.0 mm 5.0 mm Natural 100000 cycles

EVQP1905M 1.6 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Natural 100000 cycles

EVQP1F05M 2.0 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Natural 100000 cycles

EVQP1D05M 2.5 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Natural 100000 cycles

EVQP0405M 3.0 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Natural 100000 cycles

EVQ9P105M 3.5 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Natural 30000 cycles

EVQP0

EVQP1

EVQ9P

(Embossed Taping)

Oct. 201200



– ES148 –

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.


EVQP0 EVQP1EVQ9P

5.0 6.4±0.2 7.9±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.4±0.1 5.25±0.20

Unit: mm

–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ370.0±2.0 φ50.0 min. φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 14.0±1.5 — 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5




Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAS


– ES149 –

E

1

V

2

P

3

A

4

S

5 6 7 8 9

4th, 5th, 6thASCASDASAASBASDASEASF

Operating Force2.2 N2.5 N1.6 N2.0 N2.5 N3.0 N3.5 N

7thBC

Travel1.0 mm1.3 mm

Travel

1.0 mm

1.3 mm

1 A

9thA

OtherStandard

8th

1

Height from Bottomto Knob Top

5 mm

Push Plate/ Cover PlateColor

Black / Black

Specifi cations


Electrical







1.6 N±0.5 N, 2.0 N±0.6 N2.5 N±0.6 N3.0 N±0.8 N3.5 N±1.0 N

2.2 N±0.6 N2.5 N±0.6 N


Endurance Operating Life3.5 N type: 30000 cycles min.

1.6 N, 2.0 N, 2.2 N, 2.5 N, 3.0 N types: 100000 cycles min.






(Including the push plate) Steady and low contact resistance (100 mΩ max.) Excellent solderability (J-bent-type terminals)

6 mm Square Long Travel 2 terminals

SMD Light Touch Switches

Type: EVPAS




Feb. 201300



– ES150 –

A B

Circuit diagram


(4.0)

R0.2

Knob

8.0±0.1

7.0±0.3

φ4.6

6.0

1.4

6.1

1.0±

0.3

3.5 5.

0

4.0±0.1

2.0±

0.1

A B



EVPASCB1A 2.2 N 1.0 mm 5.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVPASDB1A 2.5 N 1.0 mm 5.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVPASAC1A 1.6 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVPASBC1A 2.0 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVPASDC1A 2.5 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVPASEC1A 3.0 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVPASFC1A 3.5 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Black 30000 cycles

EVPASP

(Embossed Taping)

Feb. 201300



– ES151 –

G

FA

B

E

C

D

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=12.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.


EVPAS 5.0 6.8±0.2 7.7±0.2 12.0±0.3 5.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 8.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.4±0.1 5.25±0.20

Unit: mm

–0




Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item F G

Rate (mm) 13.5±1.0 17.5±1.0

Feb. 201300


Light Touch Switches/EVQPV

– ES152 –

E

1

V

2

Q

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

0 5 KP V

6thA2GFW


7th & 8th05

Operating Force2.2 N1.6 N2.0 N2.5 N3.5 N

Push Travel1.0 mm

1.3 mm


9thK

Type

Specifi cations

6 mm Square Long Travel 2R Light Touch Switches

Type: EVQPV



(Including the push plate) High mountability, section terminals and radial taping

pack age Low contact resistance and steady contact char ac ter is tics


Electrical






Mechanical Operating Force 2.2 N 1.6 N, 2.0 N, 2.5 N, 3.5 N


Endurance Operating Life100000 cycles min.

(3.5 N type : 30000 cycles min.)








Oct. 201200


Light Touch Switches/EVQPV

– ES153 –

6.1

6.0

0.45

0.35

Terminal cross section(S=10/1)

φ4.6

H3.

5

Circuit diagramA B

0.2 max.

1.0 max.1.0 max.

1.0 max.1.0 max.

a b

0.350.3

18.0

+1

.0-

0

The direction of a or b side is randomly settled.

12.7±1.0

0.8

0.45

0.45A

5.0 +0.8–0.2

3.85±0.70

6.35±0.70 12.7±0.3

(4.4

5)

(11.4

)(8

.9)

(2.1

)

A

E

A'

E'

Adhesive tape shall notextend beyond base paper.

Adhesive tape

2.0

max

.6.0

±0.5

9.0±

0.5

18.0

+1

.0–0

.5

φ4.0±0.3

JIS C0806-2 shall be applied for the items not specified here.

0.6±

0.3

1.5

max

.

E-E' section


2-φ1.00±0.05

5.0±

0.1



EVQPVA05K 2.2 N 1.0 mm 5.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPV205K 1.6 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPVG05K 2.0 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPVF05K 2.5 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Black 100000 cycles

EVQPVW05K 3.5 N 1.3 mm 5.0 mm Black 30000 cycles

EVQPV

(Radial Taping)

Oct. 201200



– ES154 –

E

1

V

2

Q

3

Q

4

1

5 6 7 8


9

Push Plate Color

Specifi cations

Type Snap action/Push-on 1-pole 1-throw SPST

Electrical






MechanicalOperating Force 4 N, 5 N

Travel 1.0 mm







8 mm Square Long Travel SMD Light Touch Switches

Type: EVQQ1


(Including the push plate) High operating force which prevents incorrect

operation Reliable contact (dust-proof design)


Recommended Applications Operating switches for car electronic equipment, car audio systems, etc. Steering switches

Oct. 201200



– ES155 –

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1

φD0

A

B

Feeding hole


Chip pocket

FW

E

Tape width=16.0 mm

180

260MAX.

150

230

90±30 40±10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.

C

B D

CA

A

4.5±0.1

(12)

1.15

6.1±

0.1

8.5±0.1(4.5)

0.75

φ6.2

B D

5.1

+0.2– 0.16.5

+0

–0.

89.

9


Circuit diagram


EVQQ1

(Embossed Taping)




EVQQ1 6.5 8.9±0.2 10.1±0.2 16.0±0.3 7.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 12.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.40±0.05 6.8±0.2

Unit: mm

–0

Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 17.5±0.5 21.5±1.0 1.0 to 3.0 1.0±0.5

Part Numbers Operating Force Push Plate Color

EVQQ1D06M 4.0 N Natural

EVQQ1E06K 5.0 N Black

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQQJ


– ES156 –

E

1

V

2

Q

3

Q

4

J

5 6 7 8


9

Push Plate Color

Specifi cations

Type Snap action/Push-on 1-pole 1-throw SPST

Electrical

Rating 10 µA 2 Vdc to 5 mA 12 Vdc. (Resistive load)





MechanicalOperating Force 0.8 N±0.4 N 1.3 N±0.6 N 2.5 N±0.6 N 3.0 N±0.6 N

Travel 1.0 mm 1.0 mm 1.2 mm 1.75 mm

Endurance Operating Life 1000000 cycles min. 100000 cycles min. 100000 cycles min. 100000 cycles min.






8 mm Square Long Travel 2R Light Touch Switches

Type: EVQQJ

Features External dimensions : 8.0 mm8.0 mm, Height 5.0 mm, 5.5 mm, 6.1 mm (Including the push plate) Long life (self-cleaning) Low contact resistance with metal contacts Small bouncing


Recommended Applications Operating Switches for car air conditioners, car audio systems, etc. Push switches for camcorders Ten-key switch es for telephones

Application Notes: Washing is not allowed. Inclination of pushing knob shall be 3 ° max.

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVQQJ


– ES157 –

A B

AB

P Q

2-φ1.00±0.05Circuit Diagram

EVQQJF Only

5.0



JIS C0806-2 shall be applied to the items not specified here.

P QThe direction of or side is randomly settled.

E-E' section

1.5

max

.0.

6±0.

3

Test pole

8.0

C0.2

R1

φ3.4

1.0 max. 1.0 max.

0.3

0.5

0.5

0.8

18.0

+1.

0–0

.55.0

min

.1.

81.

5

5.0+0.8–0.2 3.85±0.50

12.7±1.01.3 max.

1.3 max.

E E'

6.0±

0.5

9.0±

0.5

6.35±1.00 12.7±0.3

0.3 max.

2.0

4.0

3.0

Hh

φ4.0±0.3


Adhesive tape

R0.3φ3.5

2.0

max

.

18.0

1.0

0+ –

0.3 max.

Hh

R0.3φ3.3


Part Numbers Operating Force Travel H=Height h=Mounting Base Push Plate Color Operating Life

EVQQJJ05Q 0.8 N 1.0 mm 5.0 mm 3.5 mm max. Grey 1000000 cycles

EVQQJE05D 1.3 N 1.0 mm 5.0 mm 3.6 mm max. Orange 100000 cycles

EVQQJD05B 2.5 N 1.2 mm 5.5 mm 3.8 mm max. Blue 100000 cycles

EVQQJF06Q 3.0 N 1.75 mm 6.1 mm 4.0 mm max. Grey 100000 cycles

EVQQJ

(Radial Taping)

Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAD


– ES158 –


E

1

V

2

P

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

A D

6thK

Terminal6 Terminals

Specifi cations

Features The open center space allows for fl exibility in choosing a LED Up to a 4.2-mm diameter chip LED can be mounted. Provides an excellent operational feel. • Crisp tactile feedback • Long stroke (1 mm) Supports auto refl ow soldering.


10 mm Square Center Space Long Travel SMD Light Touch Switches

Type: EVPAD

Recommended Applications Operating switches for car electronic equipment (car

audio systems, car air conditioners, etc.)


Electrical






MechanicalOperating Force 4.0 N±0.8 N







Oct. 201200

Light Touch Switches/EVPAD


– ES159 –

180

260MAX.

150

230

90 to 30 40 to 10

(Normal Temp.)

Op

erat

ion

Top

(°C

)

Soldering Time (s)

Fan or Normal Temp.

T

WA

B

E

C

Dr

t

P2 P0

P1t2

t1φD0

A

B

FW

E

Feeding hole


Chip pocketTape width=16.0 mm

t3t2

1

The delivered carrier tape shape is either 1 or 2.

Dimension t3 only applies to shape 2.

2

0.5

max

.

–0.4+010.35

3.2

0.8

φ7

9.8

9.8

10.1

5φ4

.2

φ4.5

–0.1

+0.

23.

2

0.8

0.8

0.8

1.2±

0.1 11.3±0.1

8.4±0.1

1.2±

0.1

3.2±

0.1

1.2±

0.1

A4

A3

B2

A2

B1

A1

0.7

A1

B1

A2

A3

B2

A4B1,B2

A1,A2,A3,A4


4.7

LED implementation position

(Pla

stic

pro

ject

ion)

LED implementation area

Circuit Diagram(Precautions for pattern design) Note that the terminals are exposed at the sections shaded with " " Establish electrical connection at A1, A2, A3, and A4 to improve the contact performance.


Unit: mm


Item A B C D E

Rate (mm) φ380.0±2.0 φ80.0±1.0 φ13.0±0.5 φ21.0±1.0 2.0±0.5

Item W T t r

Rate (mm) 17.5±0.5 21.5±1.0 — —

Part No. Height A B W F E P1 P2 P0 D0 Dia t1 t2 t3

EVPAD 4.6 10.7±0.2 10.7±0.2 16.0±0.3 7.5±0.1 1.75±0.10 12.0±0.1 2.0±0.1 4.0±0.1 1.5+0.1 0.40±0.05 4.8±0.2 5.8±2.0_0


EVPADK04K

(Embossed Taping)

Oct. 201200

– EV1 –

CONTENTS

Products Type/Series Part Numbers Page

Common Index / RoHs Directives EV2

Rotary

Potentiometers

Contents / Quick Selection Guide EV4

Checklist / Ap pli ca tion Notes / Common Specifi cations / Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit EV6

18 mm Square Rotary Potentiometers (High Rotational Torque) EVCX EV12

39/20 mm Center Space Rotary Potentiometers EWVYE/K/M EV13

44/25 mm Center Space Rotary Potentiometers EWVYG/H/J/L EV14

Carbon Composition

Trimmer Potentiometers


Application Notes / Common Specifi cations / Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit EV17

6FF Square Trimmer Potentiometers EVNCYA EV20

6FE Square Trimmer Potentiometers EVND EV22

Position Sensors


Checklist / Ap pli ca tion Notes / Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit EV27

10 mm GS Sensors EVWAE/D EV30

Linear Position Sensors EVAW7 EV32

15 mm Position Sensors EVWBE EV34

Encoders


Checklist / Ap pli ca tion Notes / Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit EV37

10 mm Square GS Encoders EVQVX EV40

10 mm Square SMD Encoders EVQVV EV42

Edge Drive Jog Encoders EVQWK EV44

11 mm Square GS Encoders EVER/U/V/Y EV46

12 mm Square GS Encoders EVEG/H/K/L EV49

12 mm Square GS Encoders with Push-on Switch EVEJB EV52

16 mm Square Encoders EVEP/Q EV54

18 mm Square Encoders (High Rotational Torque) EVQW EV56

20/12 mm Center Space Encoders EVQV6 EV57

27/17 mm Center Space Encoders EVQWF/VP EV58


38/25 mm Center Space Encoders EVQVN EV60


Oct. 201200


– EV2 –

Index

EV12 EV13 EV14 EV20

18 mm SquareRotary Potentiometers(High Rotation Torque)

(EVCX)

39/20 mm Center SpaceRotary Potentiometers

(EWVYE, EWVYK, EWVYM)


(EWVYG, EWVYH, EWVYJ, EWVYL)

6FF SquareTrimmer Potentiometers

(EVNCYA)

EV22 EV30 EV32 EV34

6FE SquareTrimmer Potentiometers

(EVND)10 mm GS Sensors(EVWAE, EVWAD)

Linear Position Sensors(EVAW7)

15 mm Position Sensors(EVWBE)

EV40 EV42 EV44 EV46

10 mm Square GS Encoders(EVQVX)

10 mm Square SMD Encoders(EVQVV)

Edge Drive Jog Encoders(EVQWK)

11 mm Square GS En cod ers(EVER, EVEU, EVEV, EVEY)

EV49 EV52 EV54 EV56

12 mm Square GS En cod ers(EVEG, EVEH, EVEK, EVEL)

12 mm Square GS En cod erswith Push-on Switch

(EVEJB)16 mm Square En cod ers

(EVEP, EVEQ)

18 mm Square Encoders(High Ro ta tion al Torque)

(EVQW)

Oct. 201200


– EV3 –

Index

EV57 EV58 EV59 EV60

20/12 mmCenter Space Encoders

(EVQV6)


(EVQWF, EVQVP)


(EVQV5)


(EVQVN)

EV61


(EVQV0)

RoHS Directives : The restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment

The products introduced in this catalog conform to the RoHS Directives* (enforced in July 2006).

(Newly ordered products will conform to the RoHS Directive.)

Please contact our sales staff for inquiries about the RoHS compliance of currently used products.

RoHS Direcives

Oct. 201200

Rotary Potentiometers

– EV4 –

CONTENTS

Page

Quick Selection Guide ............................................................................................................ EV5

Checklist Before Inquiry .......................................................................................................... EV6

Application Notes..................................................................................................................... EV7

Common Specifi cations........................................................................................................... EV8

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit.............................................................................................EV11

18 mm Square Rotary Potentiometers (High Rotational Torque / EVCX).......................... EV12

39/20 mm Center Space Rotary Potentiometers (EWVYE, EWVYK, EWVYM) ............... EV13

44/25 mm Center Space Rotary Potentiometers (EWVYG, EWVYH, EWVYJ, EWVYL) ........ EV14

Oct. 201200



– EV5 –



Countryof origin

Nominal TotalResistance Taper Rotation

Angle Page

18 mm Square(High RotationalTorque)

EVCX Japan 5 k to 100 k ±20 %Custom

design280 ° EV12

39/20 mmCenter Space

EWVYE

EWVYK

EWVYM

Malaysia 10 k ±20 % B 300 ° EV13


EWVYG

EWVYH

EWVYJ

EWVYL

Malaysia 10 k ±20 % B 300 ° EV14


Oct. 201200



– EV6 –

When you specify Potentiomters, please take advantages of our standard products for better price anddelivery. Please provide the following items before ordering.


ChecklistItem Information (Requirements)

Com

mon


C-2 Modifi cationPrevious supplierConventional part No.Purpose

C-3 Application

EquipmentEnvironment Indoor/Outdoor use, Stationary/Portable set, High humidity, SO2, NaClTemperature ( °C) to ( °C)Operation General use, Edge drive, Low torque

C-4 AdjustmentMethod Manual, AutomaticDirection Top, Bottom, Vertical, HorizontalDriver shape Plus/Minus screw slot, Hexagonal driver, Knob (Shape; )

C-5 MountingMethod Manual, AutomaticMounter Panasert (Model: ), Other mounter (Maker/Model: / ), Parts feeder

C-6 SolderingMethod Manual soldering, Flow soldering, Refl ow solderingConditions Temp. ( °C), Time ( s), Dipping times( )Washing Machine, Soaking, Applied solvent ( )

Ele

ctri

cal

E-1 ApplicationCircuit Volume, Tone, Balance, Circuit regulation, Others ( )Stereo tone use General tone, High-cut tone, Bass, Treble

E-2 ConditionsCurrent ac, dcRating Max. operating power ( W), Operating voltage ( V)Applied current Small current use, Applying current ( mA)

E-3 Resistance Total value/Torelance ( ) / ±20 %, ±30 %, Others (± %)E-4 Taper A, B, C, D, G, BH, 15A, 1B, 15C, 10A, 4B, H, Others ( )

E-5Trackingerror

Range ( dB) to ( dB)Specifi cations ±( dB)

E-6 Tap Necessity/Position Necessary, Unnecessary / 40 %, 50 %, 60 %, Others ( )E-7 Other requirements

Sha

pes/

Dim

ensi

ons

M-1 ShapeSize φ14, φ16, φ18

StructureUnits Single, 1-shaft 2 gang, 1-shaft 3 gang, 1-shaft 4 gang, 2-shaft 2 gang, 2-shaft 3 gang, 2-shaft 4 gang, 2-shaft 5 gang, Others ( )Shape

Side Adjustment type, Top Adjustment type

M-2 Shaft/Lever Shape F type (fl at), S type (slotted), P type (18 teeth serrations)

M-3 Mounting

Type Bushing, Soldering, Screw mounting, Others ( )

(Type with bushing)Screw dia.: M6, M7, M9, M10, 3/8 Screw pitch: 0.75 mm, 1.0 mm, 32NEFBushing length: 5 mm, 7 mm, 10 mm, 15 mm, 17.5 mm, 20 mm, 22.5 mm,

25 mm, 27.5 mm, 30 mm, 32.5 mm, 35 mm, 37 mm, 39 mm, 42.5 mm

M-4 TerminalsType Solder lug, PWB(PWB terminals) Length from mounting surface: ( mm), Layout pattern: ( )

Additional functions

M-5 Switch

Type Rotary, Pull-Push, Push-ON, Others ( )Function SPST, SPDT, DPST, DPDTRating Voltage: ( V), Current: ( A), Inrush current: ( A)Terminal type Solder lug, PWB (Height from PWB to shaft center: mm)

M-6 DetentsDetents 1 point, 11 points, 41 points, Others ( points)Position Midpoint, at 180 ° , at 200 ° , Others (at )

Oth

ers L-1 Special requirements for endurance




Previous notations for potentiometer shape “Stand-up type” (Shaft is parallel to PWB.) and “Lay-down type” (Shaft is vertical to PWB.) – have been changed in this edition to “Horizontal type” or “Side-adjust type” (Shaft or knob is parallel to PWB.) and “Vertical type” or “Top-adjust type” (Shaft or knob is ver ti cal to PWB.).

Oct. 201200



– EV7 –

Application Notes

When using our Rotary Potentiometers, please ob serve the following items to pre vent dangerous ac ci dents and deterioration of performance.

1. Prohibited items and notes in design stage1. Use within the rating

The Power Rating or Maximum Voltage varies with the size and type of a product. Also, the Power Rat ing must be reduced according to a Power De r at ing Curve. When a potentiometer is used with a cur rent of less than a few micro-amperes, theinfl uence of con tact resistance increases be cause of the circuit diagram. Check the po ten ti om e ter under actual operating conditions.

2. MigrationSome potentiometers cannot be used with dc voltage.If a po ten ti om e ter is to be used with dc volt age, spec i fy this when or der ing, or check the availabilityreferring to the “Product Spec i fi ca tions for Information.”

3. AnodizationWhen a potentiometer is used with dc voltage undercon di tions of high humidity, the ter mi nal at the side ofthe wiper (terminal 2) must bea positive elec trode, as shown in the fi g ure at right.

4. Recommended Circuit Confi gurationIt is recommended that you use the variable resistor for voltage adjustments. If it is used for current adjustments, then it may be infl uenced by the contact resistance between the resistor body and the slide, depending on the target circuit conditions. Conducting a test under actual operating conditions is highly recommended.

5. Soldering conditionsWhen performing solder dip ping, check the sol der ing conditions according to the “Product Spec i fi ca tions for Information,” be cause the conditions vary with the product.Do not wash a potentiometer after solder dipping be cause fl ux may invade the po ten ti om e ter, re sult ing in con tact failure. Avoid use of jump er ca bles near the potentiometers because fl ux may attach to them.

6. Shaft rotation wobbleIf the shaft is long, the rotation wobble increases in pro por tion to its length. To secure the quality of a set, we rec om mend use of the types with a bush ing.

7. Operating temperature conditionsTacti le feeling in operation is given seriousconsideration, and rotation torque increases under low tem per a tures (below –10 °C) depending on the prod uct. If a potentiometer is expected to be used un der low tem per a tures, specify this in ad vance.

2. Prohibited items and notes on handling1. Terminal clinch

Bending and unbending of terminals after mount ing to a PWB must be one cycle or less. More than one bend ing/unbending cycle may result in dam age.

2. Stress on the terminalsDo not apply excessive stress to terminals during han dling. Set soldering conditions with con sid er ation giv en to stress on the terminals.

3. Chemical resistanceBefore using a potentiometer with an insulated shaft, be sure to check the reactivity of the shaft with any chemicals to be used.

4. Potentiometers with a push lock type switchHandle the potentiometer with the shaft locked. If a lateral pressure above 0.4 N·m (4 kg·cm) is applied to the shaft when it is unlocked, the shaft may be bent.

5. Storage conditionsDo not store the potentiometers under hightemperatures and/or high humidity, or in a lo ca tion where cor ro sive gas may be generated. Store the po ten ti om e ters at room temperature and room hu mid i ty in a packed condition. Use them within a max i mum of 6 months. Check the date of man u fac ture on the pack age box and apply the “fi rst-in-fi rst-out” rule.If un packed potentiometers must be stored as in ven to ry, store them in a polyethylene bag to keep out air.

3. Prohibited items on fi re and smoking1. Absolutely avoid use of a potentiometer beyond its

rated range because doing so may cause a fi re. If misuse or abnormal use may result under

con di tions in which the potentiometer is used out of its rated range, take proper measures such as current interruption using a protective circuit.

2. The grade of nonfl ammability for resin used inpotentiometers is “94HB,” which is based on UL94 Stan dards (fl ammability test for plastic ma te ri als). Prohibit use in a location where a spread ing fi re may be generated or prepare against a spread ing fi re.

4. For use in equipment for which safety is requested

Although care is taken to ensure potentiometer qual i ty, inferior characteristics, short circuits, and open circuits are some problems that might be gen er at ed. To design a set which places maximumemphasis on safety, re view the affect of any sin gle fault of a potentiometer in advance andper form vir tu al ly fai l - safe design to en sure max i mum safe ty by:1. preparing a protective circuit or a protective

de vice to improve system safety, and 2. preparing a redundant circuit to improve system

safe ty so that the single fault of a po ten ti om e ter does not cause a dangerous sit u a tion.

For notes on use, the following sources were referred:

Technical report EIAJ RCR-2191A “Guideline of Notabilia for potentiometers for Use in Electronic Equipment” issued by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (Issued by March 2002)

Refer to this Technical Report for additional de tails.


1

2

3

+

–

Oct. 201200



– EV8 –

Notes:1. Angle from terminal 3 side.2. ( ) is per JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard). Unless otherwise

spec i fi ed, we consider it at 50 % rotation, however, upon request above JIS can be ap plied.

3. [ ] is only reference value.

Measuring Method

Out-put Voltage betweenTerminal 1 & 2

Operating Voltage betweenTerminal 1 & 3

Out-put Voltage betweenTerminal 2 & 3

Operating Voltage betweenTerminal 1 & 3

Taper Effective Rotation Angle

EIAJ Panasonic 50 % 50 %

15A A 10 to 25 —

1B B 40 to 60 —

15C C — 10 to 25

10A D 6 to 15 —

4B G 40 to 60 —

H BH Linear taper

100(%) 100(%)

Electrical Specifi cations

1. Taper


Oct. 201200



– EV9 –

Standard Taper

100

80

60

40

20

020 40 60 80 100

Out

put

Vol

tag

efr

omTe

rmin

al1-

2A

pp

lied

Vol

tag

eat

Term

inal

1-3

10

0(%

)

50 % Tap B (1BM), For volume control B (3BM), G (4BM)

G (4BM)B (1BM)

For volume control B (3BM)

100

80

60

40

20

020 40 60 80 100

A (15A), D (10A)

A (15A)

D (10A)

Out

put

Vol

tag

efr

omTe

rmin

al1-

2A

pp

lied

Vol

tag

eat

Term

inal

1-3

10

0(%

)

100

80

60

40

20

020 40 60 80 100

Out

put

Vol

tag

efr

omTe

rmin

al1-

2A

pp

lied

Vol

tag

eat

Term

inal

1-3

10

0(%

)

B (1B), G (4B), For volume control B (3B)

G (4B)B (1B)

For volume control B (3B)

100

80

60

40

20

020406080 0100

Out

put

Vol

tag

efr

omTe

rmin

al2-

3A

pp

lied

Vol

tag

eat

Term

inal

1-3

10

0(%

)C (15C)

C (15C)

100

80

60

40

20

020 40 60 80 100

BH (1H, 2H)

Out

put

Vol

tag

efr

omTe

rmin

al1-

2A

pp

lied

Vol

tag

eat

Term

inal

1-3

10

0(%

)

BH-2 (2H)

BH-1 (1H)

Sliding Position (%)Terminal 1 Terminal 3

Oct. 201200



– EV10 –

Bushing Dia., etc. Tightening Strength

M7 to M9 1.0 N·m

2. Nut Tightening TorqueWhen nut is tightened as specifi ed below, unevenness of shaft rotation shall not occur.

Size Shaft material Shape & Type Shaftwobble (a)

Bendingmoment

14 mm square18 mm square

(Common)

Metal shaftWithout switch

1-shaft type 0.3 mm

50 mN·mWith push switch 0.5 mm

Insulatedshaft

With bushing Single 0.5 mm

Snap-in 0.7 mm

2. TrackingThe tracking should be calculated as fol lows.Tracking (dB)=20 log (VR2/VR1)Where:VR1= Voltage between terminal 1 & 2 of sec tion R1

VR2=Voltage between terminal 1 & 2 of sec tion R2

Test voltage between terminal 1 & 3shall be 2 V to 5 V (1000±200 Hz).

Mechanical Specifi cations1. Shaft AngleShaft angle against mounting surface shall be 90 °. Shaft bend and shaft wobble shall be aL/30 (mm) max.when 50 mN·m moment applied to the measuring point of shaft.

Where:a= Constant Value as shown belowL= Distance be tween mounting surface and measuring point on the shaft

In case of a potentiometer with a tap, the mea sure ment should be made by con nect ing a fi xed resistorbetween tap ter mi nal and terminal 1. Unless oth er wise spec i fi ed, tolerance of the fi xed resistor shall be ±10 %.If your require ments different, inform us of your specifi cations.

VR2 VR1

Recommendedchassis piercing plan

φ D +0.4+0.1

1.0 mm min.

Mounted State

Oct. 201200



– EV11 –

Type, Series Part No. Packaging Quantity/Carton

Minimum Quantity/

Packing UnitNotes

18 mm SquareRotary Potentiometers(High Rotational Torque )

EVCX Tray Pack 800 pcs. 80 pcs.


EWVYEEWVYKEWVYM

Tray Pack 250 pcs. 50 pcs.


EWVYGEWVYHEWVYJEWVYL



: With bushing : L=L+7.5 mm


Oct. 201200


Rotary Potentiometers/EVCX

– EV12 –

1

E

2

V

3

C

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

X

Product Code Specifications Shaft Trims & Dimensions Taper & ResistanceShaft Trims & Dimensions

(3.5) 8.0M8 P=0.75

0.60

–0.37.0

9.0(3.8)

(1.5

)C0.5

4.5

0 –0.1

φ60 –0

.15

0.4

6.5

18.0±1.019.6±0.7

4.42.8±0.2

9.0

4-0.7

(R1.

75ho

le)

7-φ0.8+0.10

4-φ1.6+0.10

9.5

(0.7

)14

.8

6-2.0

(1.4

)

2-5.

1±0.

32-

6±0.

3

(2.4

)2-17.42-13.0±0.2

0–0.1

(2.1)

(1.5)

R0.1

18.0

18.5

max

.

PWB mounting hole for reference(Pitch tolerance:±0.1)

Mounting surface

Non-effective thread 1.0 max. Pot.case attaching part· · ·

View from mounting sidePWB thickness t=1.6

Specifi cations



Type Top Adjustment type, with or without bush ing

Me chan i cal

Rotation Angle 280 °Rotation Torque 20 mN·m to 100 mN·mDetent Pitch 10 ° to 30 °Shaft Stopper Strength 0.8 N·m min.

Elec tri cal

Nominal Total Resistance 5 k to 100 k (Tolerance ±20 %)Power Rating 0.05 WPotentiometers Type Single, DualInsulation Resistance 100 M min. at 250 VdcDielectric Withstand Voltage 300 Vac for 1 minuteNoise Level 100 mV max.

Endurance Operating Life 15000 cycles min.Minimum Quantity/ Packing Unit 80 pcs. (Tray Pack)Quantity/ Carton 800 pcs.

Features External dimensions: 18.0 mm18.0 mm, Height 8.0 mm Output accuracy (±3 %) Potentiometers and encoders available in the same

shape and dimensions

18 mm Square Rotary Potentiometers(High Rotational Torque)Type: EVCX

Recommended Applications Function switching/adjusting for control panels of car

air conditioners Signal input for monitors, audio/visual equipment

Custom design

Oct. 201200


Rotary Potentiometers/EWVYE/K/M

– EV13 –

1

E

2

W

3

V

4

Y

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Product Code Design No.Type Taper & Resistance


(View from mounting side)P.W.B thickness t=1.6

2-2

4-8

9

2 2

4-8

3-φ4

8 2-3.5

3.517.5

4-4

28

7.5

2 2

φ39φ21.2

13

20.8

3-2.

6

1.2

2-4

4

3

2-1.3

φ27

2-φ2

2-2±0.1

19.7

±0.3

50.

3±0.

12-

2.5±

0.15

2-1.5±0.15

39.3±0.3

45°±3°

3-0.6±0.1

28±0

.15

33.7

±0.0

528

±0.0

514

±0.0

5

2.6

2.6

40.5

4-4

4-R13

2-R12.5

R10.6

φ20

4-R10.8

15° 15° R19.3±0.05

38.4±0.05

2-φ2.7

2-R1

Y

#1#2

#3

Y'

#1 #2 #3

+0.1–0.2

+0.

3–0

+0.

2–0

+0 –0.1

2-3 +0.2–0

+0.1–0

2-φ2+0.1–0

φ2+0.05–0

3-φ0.8+0.1–0

2+0.05–0

+0.3–0

+0.3–0

+0.2–0

+0.6–0

+0.2–0

+0.5–0.1

+0.3

–0

+0–0.3

+0.2–0

Error proofing pin

Cross Section Y-Y'

Error proofing pin

Specifi cations


Type: EWVYE/EWVYK/EWVYM

Features Outer diameter: 39 mm, Center space diameter: 20 mm Can have a built-in LED Smooth operation feel

Recommended Applications Temperature/blower control or mode switching for car

air conditioners Volume control for car audio equipment


MechanicalRotation Angle 300 °Rotation Torque (Detents Torque) 15 mN·m to 50 mN·m

Electrical

Nominal Total Resistance 10 k (Tolerance ±20 %)Taper BPower Rating 0.1 WResidual Resistance 100 max.Insulation Resistance 50 M min. (250 Vdc)Linearity ±3 % max.Dielectric Withstand Voltage 250 Vac for 1 minuteNoise Level 47 mV max.

Endurance Operating Life 30000 cycles min.Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit 50 pcs. (Tray Pack)Quantity/Carton 250 pcs.


Oct. 201200


Rotary Potentiometers/EWVYG/H/J/L

– EV14 –

1

E

2

W

3

V

4

Y

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Product Code Design No.Type Taper & Resistance

D D'

LED

#3

AK#1#2

Y

Y'

X'X

0.9

(0.9

)(7

.05)

R15.15

R15.15

7.05

22.1

5

12.6

23.2

15.6

±0.3

23.8

±0.2

23.8±0.2

3.2+0.15–0

1.6 φ44

φ25

+0.

15–0

φ26.2 +0.6–0

1.2+0.3–0

3-2.6+0.3–0

20°

2-42-

8

(0.25)

4±0.1

20°3 3.53±0.1

8

φ31

φ31

+0

–0.6

R15

.5+

0–0

.2

φ34 +0.1–0.2

LED

VccVcc

K A#3#2#1

45.5

224 4

5-0.6±0.12 2

2

2.6

43.5±0.05

4-4

#1#2#3

R21.8±0.05

2-φ2.7

2–R1.1

2-φ21.5°1.5°

R13.3

2–1.5±0.15

32.545°± 3°45°± 3°

8.5

33±0

.15

22.1

5±0.

0516

.5±0

.05

33±0

.05

44

K A

5-φ0.8

+0.1–0

+0.05–0

φ2+0.05–0

+0.1–0

+0.1–0

4–4.5

5±0.2

Part of topfor light pipe

R15

.5+

0–0

.2

20.517.5 3.5

8

0.3±0.

1

2-2±0.12-3+0.2

–0

+0

C0.3

2-2 3-

42-

2.5±

0.15

–0.1

8 3.5

Mounting Surface

Cross Section Y-Y'

Error proofing pin

Error proofing pin

Shaft Center


(View from mounting side)P.W.B thickness t=1.6Detail of rotational shaft

Element circuitdiagram

Cross section D-D'LED part

Specifi cations


Type: EWVYG/EWVYH/EWVYJ/EWVYL

Features Outer diameter: 44 mm, Center space diameter: 25 mm Can have a built-in LED Smooth operation feel

Recommended Applications Temperature/blower control or mode switching for car

air conditioners Volume control for car audio equipment


MechanicalRotation Angle 300 °Rotation Torque(Detents Torque)

15 mN·m to 60 mN·m

Electrical

Nominal Total Resistance 10 k (Tolerance ±20 %)Taper BPower Rating 0.1 WResidual Resistance 100 max.Insulation Resistance 50 M min. (250 Vdc)Linearity ±3 % max.Dielectric Withstand Voltage 250 Vac for 1 minuteNoise Level 47 mV max.

Endurance Operating Life 30000 cycles min.Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit 50 pcs. (Tray Pack)Quantity/Carton 250 pcs.


Oct. 201200

Carbon Composition Trimmer Potentiometers

– EV15 –

CONTENTS

Page

Quick Selection Guide .......................................................................................................... EV16

Application Notes....................................................................................................................EV17

Common Specifi cations......................................................................................................... EV18

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit............................................................................................ EV19

6FF Square Trimmer Potentiometers (EVNCYA) .............................................................. EV20

6FE Square Trimmer Potentiometers (EVND) ..................................................................... EV22

Oct. 201200



– EV16 –



Country of origin

NominalTotal Resistance Taper Rotation Angle Page

6FF Square EVNCYA Malaysia 1 k2 k5 k

10 k20 k50 k

100 k200 k500 k

1 M

B 210 °

EV20

6FE Square EVND Malaysia EV22


Oct. 201200



– EV17 –

1

2

3

+

–

Application Notes

When using our Trimmer Potentiometers, please ob serve the following cautionary items to prevent danger ousac ci dents and de te ri o ra tion of device performance.

1. Prohibited items and notes in design stage1. Use within the rating

The affect of the ambient temperature on trimmer po ten ti om e ters cannot be ignored. When usingunder a high temperature, reduce the load ac cord ing to the Power Derating Curve.

2. Handling trimmer potentiometersDo not apply excessive stress to a tr im merpo tenti ometer after mounting to a PWB.

3. AnodizationWhen dc is appl ied to a wiper (terminal 2), anodizationmay occur at the con tact part of the wiper with the re sis tiveel e ment, re sult ing in ab nor malre sis tance vari a tion. When dc is used, to pre ventan od iza t ion, the re sis t ive el e ment should beconnected to the negative side and the wip er should be con nect ed to the pos i tive side, as shown in the fi g ure at right.

4. Recommended Circuit Confi gurationIt is recommended that you use the variable resistor for voltage adjustments. If it is used for current adjustments, then it may be infl uenced by the contact resistance between the resistor body and the slide, depending on the target circuit conditions. Conducting a test under actual operating conditions is highly recommended.

5. Soldering conditions1) Perform soldering for a short time on a trim mer

po ten ti om e ter. Extended sol der ing time, par tic u lar ly un der high temperature, may re sult in de te ri o ra tion of the device.

The soldering temperature must be below 260°C, and soldering time within 5 sec onds, and the load on a ter mi nal must be less than 5 N.

2) When performing solder dipping of PWB piercing type trimmer potentiometers, dry the fl ux suf fi cient ly before solder dipping. (If the fl ux is not dried, it may contaminate the trimmer and affect char ac ter is tics.)

3) Do not wash a trimmer potentiometer after solder dip ping because fl ux may invade it, resulting incon tact failure. Avoid a placement of a jumper ca ble where fl ux re mains near the main body of a trim mer potentiometer.

2. Cautionary notes regarding handling1. Storage

Do not store trimmer po ten ti om e ters under hightem per a tures and /or conditions of high humidity, or in a lo ca tion where corrosive gas may begen er at ed. In par tic u lar, when storing for longperiods, do not un pack the trim mer po ten ti om e ters Store in its orig i nal pack ag ing.

2. Operational directionSince the stopper strength at the rear side is35 mN·m, which is smaller than at the front side, op eration for adjustment from the front side isrec om mend ed.

3. Operating temperature rangeUse in the range of –20 °C to +70 °C.

4. Storage temperatureStore in the range of –40 °C to +75 °C.

3. Prohibited items on fi re and smoking1. Absolutely avoid use of a trimmer potentiometer

beyond its rated range because doing so may causea fi re. If improperly used, the trimmer potentiometer may be operated out of its rated range, take prop ermea sures such as current interruption using apro tec tive cir cuit.

2. The grade of nonfl ammability for resin used intrimmer potentiometers is “94HB,” which is based on UL94 Standards (fl ammability test for plasticmaterials). Prohibit use in a location where a spreading fi re may be generated or prepare against a spreading fi re.

4. For use in equipment for which safety is requested

Although care is taken to ensure trimmer po ten ti om e terquality, short and open circuit are some problems that may occur. Design a circuit which plac esmax i mum em pha sis on safe ty, re view the affect of any sin gle fault of a trim mer po ten ti om e ter inad vance and per form vir tu al ly fail-safe de sign to en sure max i mum safety by:1. preparing a protective circuit or a protective

de vice to improve system safety, and2. preparing a redundant circuit to improve

system safety so that the single fault of a trim mer potentiometer does not cause a dangeroussituation.

For notes on use, the following sources were referred:

Technical report EIAJ RCR-2191A “Guideline of Notabilia for potentiometers for Use in Electronic Equipment” issued by the Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association

(Issued by March 2002)

Refer to this Technical Report for additional details.


Oct. 201200



– EV18 –

20 807060400

20

40

60

80

100

33

Ambient Temperature (°C)

Rat

edLo

ad(%

)

Power Derating Curve

Adhesive tape side (Top-adjust type)

Adhesive tape side (side-adjust type) 19m

m

B

A

Electrical Specifi cations

1. Nominal Total Resistance and Tolerance

TypeNominal Total Resistance

Tolerance (%)

1 k 2 k 5 k 10 k 20 k 50 k 100 k 200 k 500 k 1 M

6 mm SquareCarbon Composition ±30

TypePowerRating

(W)

Max. Operating Voltage(V)

AmbientTemperature

(°C)

6 mm SquareCarbon Composition 0.1 R < 500 k: 50, R > 500 k: 25 50 max.


2-2.Voltage Rating

E=P·R E=Voltage rating (V) P=Power rating (W) R=Nominal total resistance ()The voltage rating should be maximum operatingvoltage when E shall exceed max i mum operatingvoltage shown in the table.

Packaging Specifi cations for Radial Taping Drawing-out of taped products Pull-strength of taped products

Drawing-out can be from top or bottom of inner car ton.

Taped products shall not be fully drawn-out from the tape when pulling off in direction A at 5.0 N max.

Taped products shall not be drawn-out from the tape when pulling off in direction B at 1.0 N for 3 sec onds.

2. Power Rating and Voltage Rating2-1. Power RatingWhen the ambient temperature is within the following pa ram e ter (see table be low), the maximum operating volt age which can be applied between ter mi nal 1 and 3 is as follows. For potentiometers operated in am bienttem per a tures above 50 °C, Power Rating shall be derated in ac cor dance with the fi gure below.

Oct. 201200



– EV19 –




MinimumQuantity/

Packing UnitNotes

6FF Square Trimmer PotentiometersType: EVNCYA EVNCYA Radial Taping


6FE Square Trimmer PotentiometersType: EVND

EVND2AEVND8A

Polyethylene Bag

(Bulk)5000 pcs. 500 pcs.

EVNDJAEVNDXAEVNDCA

Radial Taping(Reel Pack) 10000 pcs. 1000 pcs.

Oct. 201200


Carbon Composition Trimmer Po ten ti om e ters/EVNCYA

– EV20 –

E

1

Product Code Structure Material Special Knob Trims & Knob Length Taper & Resistance

V

2

N

3

C

4

Y

5

A

6

A

7

O

8

3

9

B

10 11 12

6FF Square Trimmer Potentiometers

Type: EVNCYA

Features Box-shaped, automatic mounting Radial taping supported High reliability (dustproof structure)

Recommended Ap pli ca tions Audio Visual Equipment, Home Electrical Ap pli anc es


Specifi cations

Note : R=Nominal Total Resistance

Electrical

Specifi cations

Nominal Total Resistance 1 k, 2 k, 5 k, 10 k, 20 k, 50 k, 100 k, 200 k, 500 k, 1 M

Taper B

RatingR<500 k : 0.1 W 50 V (50 °C)R>500 k : 0.1 W 25 V (50 °C)

Residual Resistance1 k<R<2 k : 60 max.

2 k<R<1 M : 3 % max., or 200 max. whichever smaller

Mechanical

Specifi cations

Rotation Angle 210 °±20 °

Rotation Torque 2 mN·m to 25 mN·m

Stopper Strength Surface : 50 mN·m, reverse side : 35 mN·m

Endurance

Operating Life 100 cycles

Resistance to Soldering Heat 240 °C to 280 °C : 5 s max., 280 °C to 300 °C : 3 s max.

Resistance to Damp After 350 hours : R<100 k+15 % −0 %, : 100 k<R<1 M+20 % −0 %

Endurance under Damp After 350 hours : 1.5 h ON 0.5 h OFF : R<100 k±15 %, : 100 k<R<1 M±20 %

Endurance under High Temperature 70 °C±3 °C After 250 hours +5 %, −15 %



Oct. 201200


Carbon Composition Trimmer Po ten ti om e ters/EVNCYA

– EV21 –

Resistance

Mountingsurface CW

Circuit diagram


The pattern foil of PWB shallnot be in this dotted squarearea.

12.7±1.0

1.3 max.

4.45 min.

1.3 max.1 max.

2m

ax.

1 max.

5.0 3.85±0.70

21.0

±0.5

6.0±

0.5

9.0±

0.5

18.0

+1.0

–0.5

+0.8– 0.2

6.35±1.30 P=12.7

φ4

0.6

1.5

max

.

6.4

7.8

#2

#1 #3

0.8±

0.1

φ3.2

6.35

3

0.8±0.12-0.5

2-1.

0±0.

5

+0.10

+0.10

– 0.10

0.3±

0.1

0.3±

0.1

30.

25

(1.9

5)

(1.2)6.35

φ2

0.8 1.6

max

.

3 max.

3.00

±0.0

5

5.00±0.05

(0.2

5)4

φ1.3

(φ2.5)2-φ1.0

6

#1 #3

#2

Cross section

Adhesive tapeAdhesive tape shall notbe over from base paper.

AA

A A


Oct. 201200


Carbon Composition Trimmer Po ten ti om e ters/EVND

– EV22 –

E

1

Product Code Structure Material Special Knob Trims & Knob Length Taper & Resistance

V

2

N

3

D

4 5 6

A

7

O

8

3

9

B

10 11 12

Note : R=Nominal Total Resistance

Electrical

Specifi cations

Nominal Total Resistance 1 k, 2 k, 5 k, 10 k, 20 k, 50 k, 100 k, 200 k, 500 k, 1 M

Taper B

RatingR<500 k : 0.1 W 50 V (50 °C)R>500 k : 0.1 W 25 V (50 °C)

Residual Resistance1 k<R<2 k : 60 max.

2 k<R<1 M : 3 % max., or 200 max. whichever smaller

Mechanical

Specifi cations

Rotation Angle 210 °±20 °


Stopper Strength Surface : 75 mN·m, reverse side : 35 mN·m

Endurance

Operating Life 100 cycles

Resistance to Soldering Heat 240 °C to 280 °C : 5 s max., 280 °C to 300 °C : 3 s max.

Resistance to Damp After 350 hours : R<100 k+15 % −0 %, : 100 k<R<1 M+20 % −0 %

Endurance under Damp After 350 hours : 1.5 h ON 0.5 h OFF : R<100 k±15 %, : 100 k<R<1 M±20 %

Endurance under High Temperature 70 °C±3 °C After 250 hours +5 %, −15 %

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit EVND2A, EVND8A : 500 pcs. Polyethylene Bag (Bulk) EVNDJA, EVNDXA, EVNDCA : 1000 pcs. Radial Taping (Reel Pack)

Quantity/Carton EVND2A, EVND8A : 5000 pcs. EVNDJA, EVNDXA, EVNDCA : 10000 pcs.

6FE Square Trimmer Potentiometers

Type: EVND

Features Top-adjust or side-adjust available Radial taping supported High reliability (dustproof construction)

Recommended Ap pli ca tions Audio Visual Equipment, Home Electrical Ap pli anc es


Specifi cations

Oct. 201200



– EV23 –

6.4

φ2

0.6

0.75 0.75

4.65

4.5

1.2φ3.2

2.5 2.5

0.8±

0.1

3-0.8±0.1#1 #3#2

Marking

2.5

5.0

8

1.7

3.8

0.4

1.85

Mountingsurface

Adjustingdirection



3-φ1.0 0.10

+

#1 #3

#2

CW

Circuit diagram

6.4

6.355.0±0.2

0.75

3.5

0.6

3.2

φ3.2

#1 #3

#2

Marking

0.8

±0.1

1.2

Mountingsurface

0.75

0.3

3.5±0.51.7

φ2

3-0.8±0.1

5.05.

0

3-φ1.0 0.10

+

#1 #3

#2

CW

Circuit diagram




Side-adjust .............................................................................................................................................................EVND2A

Knob color Orange yellow

No. 1

No. 2


Top-adjust...............................................................................................................................................................EVND8A

Oct. 201200



– EV24 –

6.4 12.7±1.0

21.0

±0.5

1.3 max. 1.3 max.

5.00±0.05

0.6

0.3±0.1

(φ2.5)

Resistance

φ3.2

3.2

φ2

3.5

1.6

max

.

3

2-0.85

0.8+0.1

#2

#1 #3

1.2

(1.2

)6.

35

62–

1.0±

0.5

2-0.5 0.10

+

2-φ1.0 0.10

+

18.0

1.0

0.5

+ –

+

φ1.3 0.10

+

3.00

±0.0

5

4(0

.25)

3 max.

9.0±

0.5

1 max. 1 max.

6.35±1.30 P=12.7±0.3

0.25

Mountingsurface

3.0±0.30.3±0.1

(1.7)

PWB mountinghole for reference

3.85±0.700.805.0

4.4 min.

φ4.0±0.3

CW#1 #3

#2


AA

0.6±

0.3

6.0±

0.5

1.5

max

.

0.8±

0.1

Adhesive tape shallnot be over frombase paper.

A – SectionA

2 max.

Circuit diagram

3.2

3.5

2-1.

0±0.

50.

8±0.

1

#2

#1 #3

6.4 Resistance

Mountingsurface

Mounting surface Adhesive tape shallnot be over frombase paper.

Adhesive tape

φ3.2

2-0.850.8±0.1

φ23

3.0±

0.3

2-0.5 0.10

+

0.6

φ2–1.0 0.10

+

φ1.3 0.10

+ 3.0 0.50.2

+–

18.0

1.0

0.5

+ –

(φ2.5)

(0.25)4

5.00±0.056

1.6

max

.

12.7±1.0

6.0±

0.5

9.0

±0.5

2 max.

1.3 max.1.3 max.

1.2

0.5

0.3(0.25)

(11)

(1.7

)6.

35±0

.30

0.3±0.1

20.0

±0.5

Circuit diagram

CW#1 #3

#2

5.0±0.8 3.85±0.70

A

6.35±1.30 P=12.7±0.3φ4.0±0.3

A

A – SectionA

EIAJ RC-1008 shall be appliedto items not specified here.



3.00

±0.0

5

1 max. 1 max.

0.6±

0.3

1.5

max

.

2.50

±0.0

5

5.00±0.05

0.8±0.12.2

5.0±0.83.85±0.70

6.35±1.301.3 max. 1.3 max.

12.7±1.06.4

1.7(2.05)

1 max. 1 max.3.46.8

3.4

12.7±0.3

20.0

±0.5 0.9

Resistance

Circuit diagram

CW#1 #3

#2

0.8±0

.1

Mountingsurface

A A

6.0±

0.5

9.0±

0.5

2 max.

0.6±

0.3

1.5

max

.

A – A

Adhesive tape shallnot be over frombase paper.

φ40±0.3

φ3.2

(1.9

5)3

0.3(0.5)

0.9 2.50±0.350.3

4.5 8

(1.9

5)

PWB mounting holefor referenceView from mounting side

Adhesive tape

18.0

1.0

0.5

+ –

0.5 0.10

+

φ1.3 0.10

+

φ2-1.0 0.10

+

Section

No. 3

No. 4

No. 5

Radial Taping Prod ucts

Side-adjust ............................................................................................................................................................ EVNDCA

Top-adjust............................................................................................................................................................... EVNDJA

Top-adjust...............................................................................................................................................................EVNDXA




Oct. 201200

Position Sensors

– EV25 –

CONTENTS

Page


Checklist Before Inquiry ........................................................................................................ EV27

Application Notes................................................................................................................... EV28


10 mm GS Sensors (EVWAE, EVWAD) .............................................................................. EV30

Linear Position Sensors (EVAW7) ........................................................................................ EV32

15 mm Position Sensors (EVWBE) ...................................................................................... EV34

Oct. 201200


Position Sensors

– EV26 –

Type, Series AppearancePart

NumbersCountry of

originTotal Resistance Linearity Life Page

10 mm GSSensors

EVWAE

EVWADJapan

5 k ±30 %

10 k ±30 %±2 % 1000000 cycles EV30

LinearPositionSensors

EVAW7 Malaysia4.7 k ±30 %

10 k ±30 %±1 %±2 %

10000 cycles EV32

15 mmPositionSensors

EVWBE Vietnam10.5 k ±30 %

21 k ±30 %±2 % 100000 cycles EV34



Oct. 201200


Position Sensors

– EV27 –

When specifying Position Sensors, please take advantage of our standard products for better price and delivery.Please provide the following items before ordering.


Checklist

Com

mon

C-1 Inquiry purpose New use, Modifi cation, Others( )

C-2 Modifi cation

Current supplier

Current part No.

Purpose

C-3 Application

Equipment

Environment Indoor/Outdoor use, Stationary/Portable set, High humidity, SO2, NaCl


C-4 Mounting Method Manual, Automatic

C-5 SolderingMethod Manual soldering, Flow soldering

Conditions Temp. ( °C), Time ( s), Dipping times( )

Ele

ctri

cal

E-1 Conditions Current ac, dc

E-2 Resistance Total value/Torelance ( ) / ±20 %, ±30 %, Others (± %)

E-3 Taper

Taper B

Linearity 1 %, 0.5 %, Others (± %)

Hysteresis ( %)

E-4 Other requirements

Sha

pes/

Dim

ensi

ons M-1 Shape

Type Rotary Slide

Size 10.0 mm, 15 mm 8.0 mm, 9.0 mm

M-2 Shaft Shape

M-3 Mounting Type PWB Soldering, Screw

M-4 Terminals Type PWB

Oth






Oct. 201200


Position Sensors

– EV28 –

LeadEyelet

Application Notes

When using our Position Sensors, please observe the following cautionary items to prevent dangerousaccidents and deterioration of device performance.

1. Prohibited items and notes in design stage1. Soldering conditions1) Soldering must be performed to the lead of the

terminals. Do not solder on the center (eyelet part) of the terminals.

2) Perform soldering only one time. When a productfor which soldering has been completed isremoved from PWB by sodering iron, etc., theprod uct shall not be used again.

3) Do not wash a position sensor after solderingbe cause fl ux may invade the position sensor,re sult ing in con tact failure, Avoid use of jumpercables near the po si tion sensors because fl ux may get at tached to them.

4) Any soldering iron used must be 20 W to 30 W, the temperature must be less than 300 °C, and within 3 seconds.

2. Prohibited items and notes on handling1. Operating temperature range

Use in the range of –10 °C to +70 °C2. Storage temperature

Store in the range of –40 °C to +70 °C3. Storage conditions

Do not store the position sensors under hightemperatures and/or high humidity, or in a locationwhere corrosive gas may be present. Store the mount ed sensors at a room temperature andhumidity in its original packaging. Use them within 6 months. Check the date of manufacture on the package box and apply the “fi rst-in-fi rst-out” rule. If un packed position sensors must be stored asinventory, store them in a polyethylene bag to keep out air.

3. Cautionary notes regarding fi re and smoking1. Absolutely avoid use of a position sensor beyond its

rated range, it could cause a fi re and abnormality. Take proper measures such as current interruption using a protective circuit.

2. The grade of nonfl ammability for resin used inposition sensors is “94HB,” which is based on UL94 Stan dards (fl ammability test for plastic materials).

Prohibit use in a location where a spreading fi re may be generated or prepare against a spreading fi re.

4. For use in equipment requiring high degrees of safety

Although care is taken to ensure position sensor quality, short circuits, or open circuits are some problems that may occur. To design a circuit which places maximum emphasis on safety, re view the affect of any single fault of a position sensor in advance and perform virtually fail-safe design to ensure maximum safety by:1. preparing a protective circuit or a protective

de vice to improve system safety, and2. preparing a redundant circuit to improve system

safety so that the single fault of a position sensor does not cause a dangerous situation.

5. For actual use, be sure to refer to “Product Specifi cations for additional information.”

Oct. 201200


Position Sensors

– EV29 –




MinimumQuantity/

Packing UnitNotes

10 mm GS SensorsEVWAE

EVWAD

Embossed Taping

(Reel Pack)6000 pcs. 1500 pcs.

Linear Position Sensors EVAW7

Tray Pack

2000 pcs.3000 pcs.

200 pcs.300 pcs.

(8 mm Type)

(9 mm Type)

15 mm Position Sensors EVWBE 500 pcs. 50 pcs.

Oct. 201200


Position Sensors/EVWAE/D

– EV30 –

1

E

2

V

3

W B

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Product Code Specification Taper & Resistance

A

Shaft Type 7th, 8th, 9thD hole TypeH hole Type

001002

ED

10 mm GS Sensors

Type: EVWAE/EVWAD

Features Low profi le (H=2.2 mm), Shaft hole diameters of up to 4 mm are available. Long operation life: 1 million operation cycles. A wide electrical output angle of a maximum 343 °, ready for SMDs


Low profi le, long life sensor, which is suitable for detecting the angles of rotating axes.

Recommended Applications Detection of robot joint angles Detection of air conditioner damper angles Detection of various control unit angles

MechanicalRating 0.05 W, 5V

Operating Force 3 mN·m max.

ElectricalTotal Resistance 5 k±30 %, 10 k±30 %

Linearity ±2 % max.

Endurance Operating Life 1000000 cycles min. (operation Angle ±30 °)



Spec i fi ca tions

Oct. 201200


Position Sensors/EVWAE/D

– EV31 –


(Pitch tolerance : ±0.1)


Circuit diagram

Mounting surface

Sleeve

Marking

7.0

5.2

9.07.

2

2.52.5

3-1.4

φ1.3

1.1+

0.05

0

#2’

#1 #3#2

#2 #1

#3

9.4±0.05

3

φ1.1

+0.05

0

#2’

0.2

0.2CO. 2

5 max.

CO. 1

2.6

3-1

1.2

0.8

5.3

7.35

#3

8.4

2-φ10

–0.1

φ50 –0

.1

2.5 2.5#1 #2

#2’

0.1

8.7

6.7

10.6

9.4

2.2

(φ6)


(Pitch tolerance : ±0.1)


Circuit diagram

Mounting surface

Marking

7.0

5.2

9.07.

2

2.52.5

3-1.4

φ1.3

1.1+

0.05

0

#2’

#1 #3#2

#2 #1

#3

8±0.05

3

φ1.1

+0.05

0

#2’

0.2

0.2

2.6

3-1

1.2

5.3

7.35

#3

8.4

2-φ10

–0.1

2.5 2.5#1 #2

#2’

0.1

8.7

6.7

10.6

8.0

2.2

φ4+0.1

0

3+0.1 0

φ4+0.1

0

3

2.8

Length

: 0.52-R

0.15

+0.

10

2.97

±0.0

5

φ4+0.1

0

3+0.1 0

φ4+0.1

0

3

2.8

Length

: 0.52-R

0.15

+0.

10

2.97

±0.0

5


EVWAWith sleeve Type

No. 1

EVWAWithout sleeve Type

No. 2

Shaft TypeD Type H Type

Shaft Type 7th, 8th, 9th

D Type 001

H Type 002

Shaft TypeD Type H Type

Shaft Type 7th, 8th, 9th

D Type 001

H Type 002

Oct. 201200


Position Sensors/EVAW7

– EV32 –

1

E

2

V

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Product Code Lever Trims & DimensionsSpecifications Taper & Resitance

BA

Linear Position Sensors (for reference only)

Type: EVAW7

Explanation Part Numbers

Specifi cations

Features A wide variety of operation strokes Long life and high resolution

Recommended Applications Car headlight angle detection sensor

EVAW7

Mechanical

Stroke 9.0 mm±0.5 mm 8.0 mm±0.5 mm

Operating Force 2 N max. 1 N max.

Electrical

Linearity ±2 % ±1 %

Total Resistance 10 k±30 % 4.7 k ±30 %

Voltage Rating 5 Vdc max. 12 Vdc max.

Taper B


Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit 300 pcs. (Tray Pack) 200 pcs. (Tray Pack)

Quantity/Carton 3000 pcs. 2000 pcs.

Oct. 201200


Position Sensors/EVAW7

– EV33 –

2-2.5

#1#3#2

Potentiometer circuit diagram

3-0.6t=0.35t=0.3

2.753.

8 3.0

9.0

15.8

Potentiometer circuit diagram

11.6

0.61.5

0.3

3 4

1.55(3)

3.4

48

15

C0.3

(5)

9

10

φ2.05

MECHANICAL STROKE

#3#1#2

#1

#3

#2


EVAW79.0 mm Stroke Type

No. 1

EVAW78.0 mm Stroke Type

No. 2

Oct. 201200


Position Sensors/EVWBE

– EV34 –

1

E

2

V

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Product Code Lever Trims & DimensionsSpecifications Taper & Resitance

B EW2-

42-

14

Circuit diagram

8

C0.5C0.5

φ15

3.54.2

2.5

2.54 2.54

15

C1

3-1

(2.95)

(1.7)

C0.7

0.7

9.5

323

2.5

4φ4.52

7.15

28.1

7

CW

Wiper

#2

Ground

+5V#3

#1

R1

R2

15 mm Position Sensors (for reference only)

Type: EVWBE

Explanation Part Numbers

Specifi cations

Features Simple dustproof structure achieved by insert molding

of the resistor element Connector terminals Long life and high resolution

Recommended Ap pli ca tions Temperature and air fl ow and mode control for

automotive climate control systems

EVWBE1 EVWBE2 EVWBE3

MechanicalRotation Angle Endless

Rotation Torque 15 m·Nm max.

Electrical

Voltage Rating 5 Vdc

Total Resistance 10.5 k±30 % 10.5 k ±30 % 21 k±30 %

Rotation Angle 100 ° 150 ° 250 °

Taper B

Linearity ±2 % max.





Oct. 201200

Encoders

– EV35 –

CONTENTS

Page


Checklist Before Inquiry ........................................................................................................ EV37

Application Notes................................................................................................................... EV38


10 mm Square GS Encoders (EVQVX) ............................................................................... EV40

10 mm Square SMD Encoders (EVQVV) ............................................................................ EV42

Edge Drive Jog Encoders (EVQWK).................................................................................... EV44

11 mm Square GS Encoders (EVER, EVEU, EVEV, EVEY) .............................................. EV46

12 mm Square GS Encoders (EVEG, EVEH, EVEK, EVEL).............................................. EV49

12 mm Square GS Encoders with Push-on Switch (EVEJB)............................................. EV52

16 mm Square Encoders (EVEP/EVEQ).............................................................................. EV54

18 mm Square Encoders (High Rotational Torque / EVQW).............................................. EV56

20/12 mm Center Space Encoders (EVQV6) ...................................................................... EV57

27/17 mm Center Space Encoders (EVQWF, EVQVP) ....................................................... EV58

27/18 mm Center Space Encoders (EVQV5) ...................................................................... EV59

38/25 mm Center Space Encoders (EVQVN) ..................................................................... EV60

60/40 mm Center Space Encoders (EVQV0)...................................................................... EV61

Oct. 201200


Encoders

– EV36 –



Country of origin Resolution Detents Operating Life Page

10 mm Square GS EVQVX China 12 Pulses/360 ° 24 Points 200000 Cycles EV40

10 mm Square SMD EVQVV Japan 3 Pulses/360 ° Withoutdetents 70000 Cycles EV42

Edge Drive Jog EVQWK Japan 15 Pulses/360 ° 15 Points 100000 Cycles EV44

11 mm Square GS

EVEREVEUEVEVEVEY

JapanVietnam

8, 12, 15, 16Pulses/360 °

16 Points,24 Points,30 Points,32 Points

30000 Cycles EV46

12 mm Square GS

EVEGEVEHEVEKEVEL

Malaysia12, 20, 24

Pulses/360 °

12 Points,20 Points,24 Points,

Without detents

30000 Cycles(Heavy-rotation

torque 15000 cycles)EV49

12 mm square GS (with Push-on Switch)

EVEJB Vietnam 20 Pulses/360 ° 20 Points 30000 Cycles EV52

16 mm SquareEVEPEVEQ

JapanVietnam

8, 16 Pulses/360 °16 Points,32 Points

1000000 Cycles30000 Cycles

EV54

18 mm square(High Rotational Torque)

EVQW Japan Absolute 5 bit Custom 15000 Cycles EV56


EVQV6 Vietnam 9 Pulses/360 ° 18 Points 30000 Cycles EV57


EVQWFEVQVP

Japan 9, 15 Pulses/360 °18 Points,30 Points

30000 Cycles EV58


EVQV5 Vietnam 9, 15 Pulses/360 °18 Points,30 Points

30000 Cycles EV59


EVQVN Malaysia 15 Pulses/360 ° 30 Points 30000 Cycles EV60


EVQV0 Japan 15 Pulses/360 ° 30 Points 30000 Cycles EV61


Oct. 201200


Encoders

– EV37 –




When specifying Encoders, please take advantage of our standard products for better price and delivery.Please provide the following items before ordering.


Checklist

Com

mon

C-1 Inquiry purpose New use, Modifi cation, Others( )

C-2 Modifi cation

Current supplier

Current Part No.

Purpose

C-3 Application

Equipment

Environment Indoor/Outdoor use, Stationary/Portable set, High humidity, SO2, Nacl


Operation General use, Edge drive, Low torque, High torque

C-4 Adjustmemt Method Manual, Automatic

C-5 MountingMethod Manual, Automatic

Mounter Panasert(Model: ), Other mounter(Maker/Model: ),Parts feeder Magazine

C-6 Soldering

Method Manual soldering, Flow soldering, Refl ow soldering

Conditions Temp. ( °C), Time ( s), Dipping times( )

Washing Machine, Soaking, Applied solvent( )

Ele

ctri

cal

E-1 Application Circuit Volume, Tone, Balance, Circuit regulation, Others( )

E-2 ConditionsRating Max. operating power( W), Operating voltage( V)

Applied current Small current use, Applying current( mA)

E-3 EncodersOutput Signal 2 phase system(Phase A or B), Others( )

Resolution 8, 9, 12, 15, 16, 20, 24, Pulse, Others/360 °

E-4 Other requirements

Sha

pes/

Dim

ensi

ons

M-1 Shape

Type Rotary, Others( )

Size 10.0 mm, 11.0 mm, 12.0 mm, 16.0 mm, 18 mm, Others( )

Shape Side Adjustment, Top Adjustment

M-2 Shaft Shape Metal Shaft(F type, S type, P type), Insulated Shaft(F type, S type)

M-3 MountingType Bushing, Soldering

(Type with bushing) Screw dia.: M7, M9, Screw pitch: 0.75 mm, Bushing length: 5.0 mm, 7.0 mm, 10.0 mm

M-4 TerminalsType Solder lug, PWB

(PWB terminals) Length from mounting surface( mm), Layout pattern( )

M-5 Additional function

M-6 Switch

Type Push-On, Others( )

Poles & Throws 1 pole 1 throw

Rating Voltage:( V), Current:( A), Inrush current:( A)

Terminal Type PWB terminal, Others( )

M-7 Detents 16 points, 18 points, 20 points, 24 points, 30 points, 32 points, Others( point)

Oth



Oct. 201200


Encoders

– EV38 –

Application Notes

When using our Encoders, please observe the fol low ing cautionary items to prevent dangerous ac ci dents and de te ri o ra tion of performance.

1. Prohibited items and notes in design stage1. Soldering conditions

When per forming solder dipping, check thesoldering conditions according to the Individual “Product Specifi cations,” because the conditions vary from prod uct to product.Do not wash an encoder after solder dippingbecause fl ux may invade the encoder, resulting in contact failure. Avoid use of jumper cables near the en cod ers be cause fl ux may get to them.

2. Shaft rotation wobbleIf the shaft is long, the rotation wobble increases in pro por tion to its length. To secure the quality of a set, we rec om mend use of the types with a bush ing.

3. Operating temperature conditionsTacti le feeling in operation is given seriousconsideration, and rotat ion torque increasesunder low tem per a tures (below –10 °C) depending on the prod uct. If a encoder is expected to be usedunder low tem per a tures, specify this in advance.

2. Prohibited items and notes on handling1. Chemical resistance

Before using a potentiometer with an insulated shaft, be sure to check the reactivity of the shaft with any chemicals to be used.

2. Storage conditionsDo not store the encoders under high tem peraturesand/or high humidity, or in a location wherecorrosive gas may be generated. Store the en cod ers at room tem per a ture and room humidity in a packed condition. Use them within a maximum of 6 months. Check the date of manufacture on the pack age box and apply the “fi rst-in-fi rst-out” rule. If unpackedencoders must be stored as in ven to ry, store them in a polyethylene bag to keep out air.

3. Prohibited items on fi re and smoking1. Absolutely avoid use of a encoder beyond its rat ed

range because it may cause a fi re. If misuse or abnormal use may result in con di tions

in which the encoder is used out of its rated range, take proper measures such as currentinterruption using a protective circuit.

2. The grade of nonfl ammability for resin used inencoders is “94HB,” which is based on UL94Standards (fl ammability test for plastic materials). Pro hib it use in a location where a spreading fi re may be generated or prepare against a spreading fi re.

4. For use in equipment for which safety is re quest ed

Although care is taken to ensure encoder quality,in fe ri or characteristics, short circuits, and opencir cuits are some problems that might be gen er at ed.To design a set which places maximum em pha sis on safety, re view the affect of any sin gle fault of a en cod er in ad vance and perform virtually fail-safe design to ensure maximum safe ty by:1. preparing a protective circuit or a protective

de vice to improve system safety, and2. preparing a redundant circuit to improve sys tem

safety so that the single fault of a encoder does not cause a dangerous situation.

5. For actual use, be sure to refer to “Product Specifi cations for information.”

Oct. 201200


Encoders

– EV39 –



Minimum Quantity/

Pack ing UnitNotes

10 mm Square GS Encoders EVQVX Tray Pack 3000 pcs. 300 pcs.

10 mm Square SMD Encoders EVQVVEmbossed Taping

(Reel Pack)6000 pcs. 1500 pcs.

Edge Drive Jog Encoders EVQWK


1600 pcs. 400 pcs.


11 mm Square GS Encoders

EVEREVEU

Tray Pack

250 pcs.or

300 pcs.50 pcs.

EVEVEVEY 500 pcs. 100 pcs.

12 mm Square GS En cod ers

EVEGEVEHEVEKEVEL


1000 pcs. 100 pcs. L<25.0 mm

2000 pcs. 200 pcs. L>26.0 mm


(with Push-on Switch)EVEJB


500 pcs. 100 pcs.

16 mm Square Encoders EVEPEVEQ Tray Pack 200 pcs. 50 pcs.

18 mm Square Encoders

(High Rotational Torque)EVQW Tray Pack 800 pcs. 80 pcs.

20/12 mm

Center Space EncodersEVQV6 Tray Pack 2000 pcs. 100 pcs.

27/17 mm

Center Space EncodersEVQWFEVQVP Tray Pack 800 pcs. 80 pcs.

27/18 mm


38/25 mm

Center Space EncodersEVQVN Tray Pack 250 pcs. 50 pcs.

60/40 mm


Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQVX

– EV40 –

1

Product Code Specifications Shaft Trims & Dimensions

E

2

V V X

3

Q

4 5 6 7 8 9

Output(Pulses)

10 11 12

Features Compact and thin design (Body thickness: 4 mm) Good rotational feel Supports vertical self-standing mounting onto printed

circuit boards


Type: EVQVX


Recommended Applications Computer peripherals (Mouse) Information & communications equipment For input devices of measuring instruments and

various electronic equipment

Specifi cations

Mechanical

Rotation Angle 360 ° (Endless)


Detents 24 points

Electrical

Output Signals Phase A and B

Resolution 12 pulses/360 °

Rating 1 mA 10 Vdc (at each bit)

Contact Resistance 10 max.



Bouncing 5 ms max.

Endurance Rotation Life 200000 cycles min.



Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQVX

– EV41 –

0.01 µF 0.01 µF

Signal A

A

Signal B

Encoder

B

COM

5 V dc

10 k 10 k

10 k 10 k

T1 T2 T3 T4

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Stable position of detent

C.W direction (View D )

Signal A

Signal B

Phase difference T1, T2, T3 , T4

(At rotational speed 60 r/min.)Initial............... 4 m sec. min.After life........ 2.5 m sec. min.

6-60°

1.25

2.0

5.0

10.8

6.8±

0.5

0.8±

0.5 9.7±1.0

3.6±0.52-1.8+0.1

1.3±

1.0

4.2±

0.5

2.4±

0.5

9.7±1.0

PWB mounting hole for reference (Tolerance : ±0.1)(View from mounting side)

(PWB thickness t=1.6)

t=0.4

30°±3°

4.0 0.6

2.7

4.2

2.0

0.7

(5.3)

H

5.0

4.0

4.1

3-0.8±0.1

5.0Height

MountingSurface

3.5

3.5

(φ3.

8)

3.05

9.7

11.6±1.0

Shaft hole shape and dimension

φ2.98±0.1

3-φ1

.0+0

.1

6.8

2.0

4.0

R4.1

COMB

A

View D

COMBA

M

7.0 mm9.0 mm

11.0 mmH

0

3-1.73+0.1–0

2-2.

1+0.

10

–0

... Leg position


EVQVX

Test Circuit Diagram Phase Difference

Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQVV

– EV42 –

1

Product Code Specifications Shaft Trims & Dimensions

E

2

V V V

3

Q

4 5 6 7 8 9

Output(Pulses)

10 11 12

Features Low profi le(H=2.2 mm), Shaft hole diameters of up to 4 mm. Light operation with a rotation torque of 2 mN·m Automatic mounting and SMDs.

10 mm Square SMD Encoders

Type: EVQVV


Recommended Applications Air conditioning temperature controls Input of operation units Computer peripherals

Specifi cations

MechanicalRotation Angle 360 ° (Endless)

Rotation Torque 2 mN·m max.

Electrical







Bouncing 5 ms max.




Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQVV

– EV43 –

0.01 µF 0.01 µF

A B

COM

5 Vdc

10 k 10 k

10 k 10 kSignal A Signal B

Encoder

Signal A

Signal B

T4T3T2T1

120 °±10 °

4-15±5 °4-15±5 °

4–30 °C.W direction

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

0.2

7.0

5.2

9.0

7.2

2.52.53-1.4

10.6

6.7

8.7

2.52.58.4

7.35

5.3

φ4 +0.11.2

3-1

2.6 0.2

8.0±0.05

8.0±0.15

3.0

CW

–0

–0

3.0+0.12.3±0.2

2.2±0.2

1.3+0.1

(0.1)

B : Output signal BA : Output signal A

(View from parts side.)PWB thickness t=1.6

Tolerance : ±0.1


COM

COM

COMA B

BA

COM

–0

1.1+

0.05

0

φ1.1

+0.0

50

2-φ1+0–0.1


EVQVV


Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQWK

– EV44 –

1

E

2

V

3

Q

4 5 6 7 8 9

Product Code Specifications Wheel Shape

W K

Mechanical

EncoderDetents 15 points


Push-on SwitchTravel 0.3 mm (Thin-Type : 0.2 mm)

Operating Force 4.5 N±1.5 N

ElectricalEncoder


Output Signals 2-Phases (A and B)


Push-on Switch Contact Resistance 100 m

EnduranceEncoder Rotation Life

100000 cycles min.Push-on Switch Operating Life


400 pcs. Embossed Taping (Reel Pack)


1600 pcs.

Edge Drive Jog Encoders

Type: EVQWK

Specifi cations

Features Tactile rotary operation and push operation Refl ow soldering type available Anti-electrostatic measures available


Recommended Applications Memory paging and transmitting Menu selection and input for Portable Electronic Equip ment

Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQWK

– EV45 –

R0.25

11.3

6.35

1.0

0 –0.1

1.52.5

10.2φ15.00±0.15

7.6±

0.1

7.05

±0.1

5

φ3.0

Pin-gate within φ8.0 Custom-made knob availableN.C.

N.C.

BSW1SW2SW1comA

6-0.

85-

1.75

5.0

13.0

11.4

5

0.5

1.20

–0.1

0.12

0.1

2.9

0 –0.2

5.4±

0.2

(2.5

)

0.5±

0.1

Ground terminals for ESD 0.128.04.1

APart (terminal)

1.0

R1.451.4

6.4 3.80±0.150.5

φ1.00

–0.1R5.0±0.1

5.6

(Kno

bro

tatio

nal

cent

er)

1

0.5 max.A Detail

Circuit diagram

Com A

SW1 SW2

B

SW1 PWB mounting hole for reference(Pitch tolerance: ±0.1)


2-R0.5

5.06.4

φ1.10+0.05

0

1.2+0.1

0

1.0

1.6

10.5

2-1.

6

2-1.0

4-R0.5

Support leg(No electrical connection)

Terminal for reinforcing



Recommendedland pattern

1.6±0.20.3 max.

R0.3

1.0

0 -0.1

φ15.00±0.15

φ9.8

φ2.5

N.C

10.2

6-0.

85-

1.75

5.2

11.8

7.5

6.1

B

SW2

SW1

SW1

comA

N.C

0.55±0.10

2-C0.25

6-1.

24.

72.5

2-2

6-1.05-1.75

4.45.8 2-2.2

2.51.4

5.5 4.70±0.15φ1.0 0

-0.1

(0.5)

4.3

9.5

1.4

4.1

1.60

+0.

05-0

.10

3.65

±0.2

0

0.35

R1.45

φ1.0 0-0.1R5.

0±0.1

1.1

φ1.10±0.05

9.54.3

9.6

1.0

+0.

10

1.3

R0.55

2-R0.5

1.10

±0.0

5

1.4


No. 2

No. 1

EVQWK4

EVQWKA

Thin-type(H=3.5 mm)

Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVER/U/V/Y

– EV46 –

1

E

2

V

3

E

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Product Code Shaft Trims & DimensionsSpecifications Output(Pulses)

R

U

V

Y

Reflow Type

Minimized Shaft Wobble Reflow Type

Wave Soldering Type

Minimized Shaft Wobble Wave Soldering Type

4 th Type

Specifi cations

EVER(Refl ow Type)

EVEV(Wave Soldering

Type)

EVEU(Minimized Shaft

Wobble Refl ow Type)

EVEY(Minimized Shaft Wobble

Wave Soldering Type)

Mechanical

Rotation Angle 360 ° (Endless)Shaft Pull/Push Strength 100 N min.Shaft Wobble 0.6L/30 (mm) max. 0.35L/30 (mm) max.Rotation Torque 3 mN·m to 20 mN·mDetents 16 points, 24 points, 30 points, 32 pointsShaft Length Range L1=15 to 20 mm L1=15 to 30 mm L1=16 to 20 mm

Electrical

Output Signals Phase A and BResolution 8, 12, 15, 16 pulses/360 °Rating 1 mA 10 Vdc (at each bit)Contact Resistance 1 max.Chattering 3 ms max.Insulation Resistance 50 M min. (at 250 Vdc)Dielectric Withstanding Voltage 300 Vac for 1 minuteBouncing 5 ms max.

Switch Part

Type SPST Push-onRating 20 mA 16 VdcContact Resistance 100 m max.

Operating Force 0.4 mm travel type : 3 N, 4 N , 6 N 1.5 mm travel type : 2.5 N, 4 N , 5 N

Travel 0.4 mm, 1.5 mm

EnduranceRotation Life (Encoder) 30000 cycles min.Operating Life (Switch) 30000 cycles min.

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit 50 pcs. (Tray Pack) 100 pcs. (Tray Pack) 50 pcs. (Tray Pack) 100 pcs. (Tray Pack)Quantity/Carton 250 pcs. or 300 pcs. 500 pcs. 250 pcs. or 300 pcs. 500 pcs.

Features Low Profi le : Refl ow Type 3.5 mm, Wave Soldering Type 4 mm Minimized shaft wobble type is also available The refl ow type allows the product to be automatically

mounted and refl ow-soldered


Type:EVER/EVEU/EVEV/EVEY


Recommended Applications Car audio, car navigation, car air conditioners

Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVER/U/V/Y

– EV47 –

Mounting Surface

Shaft shape and dimension

Switch circuit diagram.S.P.S.T.

(Notice)Commonness of encoder.

Center of shaft



C0.5

5.0

(SW)

(ENC)

2-0.8±0.1

3-0.8±0.15.0

BC0.5

3.5

2.0

7.5

7.0

3.5 4.0L1

(L2)(B) -0

.104.

5

-0.10

φ6

SCOM

COM S

ABB

12.8

7.5

7.0

5.0±0.05

5.0±0.05

0+0.15-φ1

0+0.1

2-1.8

0+

0.1

2-2.

1

8.5B B AY'

13.6

5.8

12.0

6.2 11

.6X

YSCOM

X'

-0.10

φ7

5.0

4.5±

0.1

3–1±0.1

2–1.5±0.1

5.0

2–3

–0.1φ1.0+0

–0.1φ1.8+0

(SW)

(ENC)

Mounting Surface

Shaft shape and dimension


(Notice) Commonness of encoder.PWB mounting hole for reference (Tolerance : ±0.1)


Center of shaft

(Hole)

(Hole)

(Throuh Hole)

The position changes with Resolution pulse

(L2)(B)

C0.5

–0.10 –0.10

4.5 φ6

COM S

0+0.12-φ1.2

2-3.5

4.5

0+0.1φ1.1

3-1.55.0±0.05

11.8±0.05

BAB

SCOM

16.5

3-22-

4

7.3

2-2 7.

0

0+0.05φ1.82-2

5.0±0.05

8.5Y' ABB

3-0.

8max

.

3-11.0

2-0.

8

0.82-13.5 B

C0.5L1

11.6

6.2

15.512.0

5.8

X'

COM SY

X

2-0.

8max

.

–0.10

φ7

4–44.02.0

R0.1

C0.2C0.21.0

0.8

11.6

6.2

3.5

2–0.

8

3–1

2–1

15.512.0

8.5

5.8

2–0.

8m

ax.

3–0.

8m

ax.

(L3)(L2)

L1

C0.5 (7.8)

–0.1φ8.0+0

–0.1φ8.2+0

–0.15φ9.0+0

–0.1

7.0+

0

X'X

A

SCOM

Y'

Y

BB

Y

X'X

Y'0

+0.12-φ1.22-3.5

4.5

0+0.1φ1.1

3-1.55.0±0.05

11.8±0.05

BAB

SCOM

16.5

3-22-

4

7.3

2-2 7.

0

0+0.05φ1.82-2

5.0±0.05

5.0

4.5±

0.1

3–1±0.1

2–1.5±0.1

5.0

2–3

–0.1φ1.0+0

–0.1φ1.8+0

(SW)

(ENC)

Mounting Surface

Shaft shape and dimensionMaterial:Zinc alloy for die casting

PWB mounting hole for reference (Tolerance : ±0.1)View from mounting side

Center of shaft

(Hole)

(Hole)

(Throuh Hole)

The position changes with Resolution pulse


(Notice) Commonness of encoder.

COM S


EVER(Refl ow Type)

EVEU(Minimized Shaft Wobble Refl ow Type)

EVEV(Wave Soldering Type)

No. 3

No. 1

No. 2

L1 (L2) (L3)

16.0 mmto 20.0 mm

12.5 mmto 16.5 mm

6.5 mmto 10.5 mm

Bushing length L1 (L2)

B5.0 mm 15.0 mm

to 17.0 mm11.5 mm

to 13.5 mm

7.0 mm 17.0 mmto 20.0 mm

13.5 mmto 16.5 mm

Bushing length L1 (L2)

B5.0 mm 15.0 mm

to 17.0 mm11.0 mm

to 13.0 mm

7.0 mm 17.0 mmto 30.0 mm

13.0 mmto 26.0 mm

Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVER/U/V/Y

– EV48 –



OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Signal A

Signal B

T1 T2 T3 T4

CW

Detent steady point

0.01 µF 0.01 µF

Signal A

Term.A

Signal B

Term.B

Term.C

Encoder

5 Vdc

10 k 10 k

10 k 10 k

(L2)

L1

φ8±0

.08

3-1.4

2-1.6 3.5

C0.7

(7.2)

2.04.04.0

3.5

2–0.8-±0.1

3–0.8-±0.1

11.6

6.2

12.0

8.5

5.8

(L3)

13.6

7.0

7.5

5.0

5.0

2.0

C0.2C0.2

R0.1Y' AB B

X'

Y

X

S(SW)

(ENC)

X

Y

X'

24 teeth serrtions

No serrtions 2

–0.15φ8.2+0

–0.15φ9+0

COM S

ABB

12.8

7.5

7.0

5.0±0.05

5.0±0.05

0+0.15-φ1

0+0.1

2-1.8

0+

0.1

2-2.

1

4–4COM

Material:Zinc alloy for die casting

Mounting Surface

Center of shaft




(Notice) Commonness of encoder.

COM S


EVEY(Minimized Shaft Wobble Wave Soldering Type)

No. 4


L1 (L2) (L3)

16.0 mmto 20.0 mm

12.0 mmto 16.0 mm

6.0 mmto 10.0 mm

Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVEG/H/K/L

– EV49 –

1

E

2

V

3

E

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Product Code Output (Pulses)Specifications Combination of Shaft

Specifi cations


Type: EVEG/EVEH/EVEK/EVEL

Features Lineup of high rotation-torque-type (50 mN·m) A wide range of standard products


Recommended Applications Volume for audio/visual equipment Tuner for communication units Mode selection for measurement instruments

Torque typeCombination of

BushingThick ness

Height Detents (Resolution/Pulses)

15.0 mm 17.5 mm 20.0 mm 22.5 mm 25.0 mm 30.0 mm 12 points (12 pulses)

24 points (24 pulses)

Without detents(12 pulses, 24 pulses)

Heavy-rotationtorque

(10 mN·m to 50 mN·m)

Die-cast (7.0,12.0 mm) 5.5 mm Sleeve (7.0,12.0 mm) 5.5 mm

Standard type(3 mN·m to 20 mN·m)

Barling (5.0 mm) 5.0 mm Barling (1.6 mm) 5.0 mm Die-cast (7.0 mm) 5.5 mm Sleeve (7.0 mm) 5.5 mm

Product Chart

Mechanical

Rotation Angle 360 ° (Endless)Shaft Pull/Push Strength 80 N min.Shaft Wobble 0.7L/30 mm max.

Rotation TorqueStandard Type 3 mN·m to 20 mN·mHeavy Rotation Torque 10 mN·m to 50 mN·m

Detents 12 points, 20 points, 24 points, without detents(Heavy rotation-torque without detents)

Electrical

Output Signals Phase A and BResolution 12, 20, 24 pulses/360 °Rating 1 mA 5 Vdc, 1 mA 10 VdcContact Resistance 1 max.Chattering 2 ms max.Insulation Resistance 10 M min. (at 50 Vdc)Dielectric Withstanding Voltage 50 Vac for 1 minute Bouncing 5 ms max.

EnduranceOperating Life

Standard Type 30000 cycles min.Heavy Rotation Torque 15000 cycles min.

Operating Temperature –10 °C to +60 °CStorage Temperature –40 °C to +85 °C

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit L<25.0 mm 100 pcs. Polyethylene Bag(Bulk) L>26.0 mm 200 pcs. Polyethylene Bag(Bulk)

Quantity/Carton L<25.0 mm 1000 pcs. L>26.0 mm 2000 pcs.

Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVEG/H/K/L

– EV50 –

14.0

3.5

12.4

12.4

L1

5.5 L2

2.0±

0.1

7.5

–0.208.0

–0.20

8

-0.20

φ 9.0

0+0.1

3-φ1.0

7.5

5.0

13.20+

0.1

2-2.

1

0+0.12-2.0

Mounting surface

PWB mounting hole for reference(pitch tolerance : ±0.1)


Center of shaft

PWB thickness : t=1.6

14.0

7.7

12.4

12.4

5.5

2.0±

0.1

M9 P=0.751.0

7.5

0+0.1

3-φ1.0

7.5

5.0

13.20+

0.1

2-2.

1

0+0.12-2

Mounting surface



Center of shaft

PWB thickness : t=1.63.5

L1

L2

14.0

3.5

12.4

12.4

5.00.7

2.0±

0.1

7.5

–0.1

+0.

2φ6

.8

BCOMA0+0.1

3-φ1.07.

55.0

13.20+

0.1

2.1

2-

0+0.12-2

Mounting surfacePWB mounting hole for reference

(pitch tolerance : ±0.1)View from mounting side

Center of shaft


L1

L2

Dimensions in mm (not to scale) High rotation-torque / Bushing Type with Sleeve ....................................................................... Without detents : EVEKE2

With detents : EVEGA1 Standard rotation-torque / Bushing Type with Barling ...............................................................Without detents : EVEGA2

With detents : EVEGC1 Standard rotation-torque / Bushing Type with Die-cast .............................................................Without detents : EVEGC2

No. 3

No. 2

No. 1

Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVEG/H/K/L

– EV51 –

5 Vdc

A B

COM

0.01 µF

10 k

0.01 µF

10 k

10 k

10 kSignal A Signal B

Encoder

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Signal A

Signal B

T1 T2 T3 T4

CW

Detent steady point


(At rotational speed 60 r/min.)Initial..............3.5 m sec. min.After life........ 2.5 m sec. min.

L1

L3

-0.10

6.0

φ

-0.10

4.5

Corner Cut

L2


Bushing TypeDimensions

L1 L2 L3 Corner Cut

Barling

15.0 mm 1.6 mm 7.0 mm 1.5 mm17.5 mm 5.0 mm 5.0 mm 1.5 mm20.0 mm 5.0 mm 7.0 mm 1.5 mm22.5 mm 5.0 mm 7.0 mm 1.5 mm25.0 mm 5.0 mm 12.0 mm 1.5 mm

Sleeve

20.0 mm 7.0 mm 7.0 mm 1.5 mm22.5 mm 7.0 mm 7.0 mm 1.5 mm25.0 mm 7.0 mm 12.0 mm 1.5 mm

30.0 mm 7.0 mm 12.0 mm 1.5 mm

Die-cast

20.0 mm 7.0 mm 7.0 mm 1.5 mm22.5 mm 7.0 mm 7.0 mm 1.5 mm25.0 mm 7.0 mm 12.0 mm 1.5 mm

30.0 mm 12.0 mm 12.0 mm 1.5 mm

Shaft Trims and Dimensions in mm

High-rotation torque

Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVEJB

– EV52 –

1

E

2

V

3

E J B

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Product Code Output (Pulses)Specifications Combination of Shaft& Bushing

Specifi cations

12 mm Square GS Encoderswith Push-on Switch

Type: EVEJB

Features Thin type encoder with vertical push-on switch Insulated shaft or metal shaft types are available


Recommended Applications Volume and tone control for audio/visual and car audio

equipment Tuner for communication units Mode selection for measurement instruments

Mechanical


Shaft Pull/Push Strength 80 N min.

Shaft Wobble 0.7L/30 mm max.


Detents 20 points

Electrical



Rating 1 mA 10 Vdc


Chattering 2 ms max.



Bouncing 5 ms max.

Switch Part

Type SPST Push-on

Rating 20 mA 16 Vdc


Operating Force 3 N, 6 N

Travel 0.4 mm

Endurance

Operating LifeEncoder 30000 cycles min.

Switch 15000 cycles min.


Storage Temperature –40 °C to +85 °C

Minimum Quantity/Packing Unit 100 pcs. Polyethylene Bag(Bulk)


Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVEJB

– EV53 –

5 Vdc

A B

COM

0.01 µF

10 k

0.01 µF

10 k

10 k

10 kSignal A Signal B

Encoder

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Signal A

Signal B

T1 T2 T3 T4

CW

Detent steady point


(At rotational speed 60 r/min.)Initial..............3.5 m sec. min.After life........ 2.5 m sec. min.

L1

L3

-0.10

6.0

φ

-0.10

4.5

Corner Cut

L2

Mounting surface



Center of shaft


Operation stroke

COMSW

Encoder SideBA3.65

7.0

7.5

0.4

12.48.0

R4.5

12.4

5.0L1

L2

–0+0.1

–0+0.

1

5-φ1

–0+0.12-22-

2.1

13.25.0

5.0

7.0±

0.05

7.5

5±0.05

Mounting surface



Center of shaft


C0.5

3.65

7.0

7.5

0.3

COMSW

Encoder SideBA

12.48.0

R4.512

.4

5.0L1

L2

Operation stroke–0+0.1

–0+0.

15-φ1

–0+0.12-22-

2.1

13.25.0

5.0

7.0±

0.05

7.5

5±0.05


Shaft TypeDimensions

L1 L2 L3 Corner Cut

Metal 15.0 mm 4.0 mm 5.0 mm 0.5 mm

Insulated20.0 mm 7.0 mm 6.0 mm 1.5 mm

25.0 mm 9.0 mm 10.0 mm 1.5 mm

Shaft Trims and Dimensions in mm

No. 1

Standard rotation-torque / Bushing Type with Sleeve / with Switches .............................................With detents : EVEJBB

No. 2

Standard rotation-torque / Bushing Type with Sleeve / with Switches .............................................With detents : EVEJBE


Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVEP/Q

– EV54 –

1

E

2

V

3

E

4

PQ

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Product Code Combination of Shaft & BushingFunction Output (Pulses)

Switch Classification

Specifi cations

EVEP EVEQ

Mechanical


Shaft Pull/Push Strength 100 N min.

Shaft Wobble0.1 mm max.(Length form mounting surface : 21.5 mm)

( 50 mN·m is applied on the point 2 mm from the shaft tip)

Rotation Torque 25 mN·m max.

Detents 16 points 32 points

Electrical


Resolution 8 pulses/ 360 ° 16 pulses/ 360 °






Bouncing 5 ms max.

Switch Part

Type SPST Push-on

Rating 20 mA 16 Vdc


Operating Force 6 N

Travel 0.5 mm

EnduranceRotation Life (Encoder) 1000000 cycles min. 30000 cycles min.

Operating Life (Switch) 1000000 cycles min. 30000 cycles min.



16 mm Square Encoders

Type:EVEP/EVEQ

Features Good operational feel Long life due to high click torque Shaft wobble : 0.1 mm max.

Recommended Applications Centralized control of automotive audio equipment, navigation systems, and air conditioners.


Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVEP/Q

– EV55 –

T4T3T2T1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

Signal A

Signal B

Detent steady point

C.W



Signal A

5 Vdc

10 k

10 k

10 k

10 k

0.01 µF0.01 µF

Term.C

A B

Encoder

Signal B

17.0

16.5

EBCOM.AD

+0.05- 0.1φ12.0

+0.05- 0.1

+0

-0.2

φ13.0+0.1- 0.05φ12.7

+0

-0.1

5

+0

-0.1

5

2-0.

5

12.8

11.8

+0

-0.0

5φ1

.8

+0.1-04-φ1.9

16.6.±0.05

D ACOM.B E

+0.1-05-φ1.0

+0.05-0φ1.85

15.0

0±0.

05

21.5

7.5

13.0 12

.09.

0±0.

1

DE 9.0

P2.5x4=10

1.5

90°±

3°0.6

B:Output signal BA:Output signal A

Mountingsurface

except gate area


(View from mounting side)PWB thickness t=1.6

Center of shaft

S.P.S.TSwitch circuit diagram.


EVEP/EVEQ


Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQW

– EV56 –

1

E

2

V

3

Q

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

W

Product Code Specifications Output(Pulses)Shaft Trims & Dimensions

(3.5) 8.0M8 P=0.75

0.60

–0.37.0

9.0(3.8)

R0.1

(1.5

)C0.5

4.5

0 –0.1

φ60 –0

.15

0.4

6.5

18.0±1.019.6±0.7

4.42.8±0.2

9.0

18.0

18.5

max

.

4-0.7(R1.

75ho

le)

7-φ1.0+0.10

4-φ1.6+0.10

9.5

(0.7

)14

.8

6-2.0

(1.4

)

2-5.

1±0.

32-

6±0.

3

(2.4

)2-17.42-13.0±0.2

0–0.1

Joint part with Encoder case and PWB

(2.1)

(1.5)

Mounting surface

Custom design

Non-effective thread 1.0 max.


· · ·

PWB mounting hole for reference(Pitch tolerance:±0.1)

Type Top Adjustment type, with or without bush ing

Mechanical

Rotation Angle 360 ° (Endless)Shaft Pull/Push Strength 80 N min.Shaft Wobble 0.7L/30 (mm) max.Rotation Torque 20 mN·m to 100 mN·mDetent Pitch 10 ° to 30 °

Electrical

Output Signals Gray codeResolution Absolute 5 bit (Custom design of 6 bit max. available)Rating 5 mA 10 VdcContact Resistance 1 max.Chattering 2 ms max.Insulation Resistance 100 M min. (at 250 Vdc)Dielectric Withstanding Voltage 300 Vac for 1 minuteBouncing 5 ms max.

Endurance Rotation Life 15000 cycles min.Minimum Quantity / Packing Unit 80 pcs. (Tray Pack)Quantity / Carton 800 pcs.

Features External dimensions : 18.0 mm18.0 mm, Height 8.0 mm Absolute 5 bit available

18 mm Square Encoders (High Rotational Torque)

Type: EVQW

Specifi cations

Recommended Applications Function switching/adjusting for control panels of car

air conditioners Signal input for monitors and audio/visual equipment



Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQV6

– EV57 –

E

1

V V

2

Q 6

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Product Code Type Design No. Output(Pulses)

1

5.5

20

20.6

14.3

(21.7)

16.4

2–φ1

.511

.511

.5φ15.

6

211

51.5

2-2.

3

8

9.5

φ20.2φ11.6

BA

COM

R0.75

2

23

5.5

2

3–φ1

φ1.5

1.5

16.42-1.8

2-R0.9

2-4.

3(19.3)21.1


PWB thickness t=1.6

Specifi cations


Rec om mend ed Applications Car audio products (adjustment of volume, tone,

tun ers, etc.) AV equipment (control of edit functions of VCRs,

CD players, etc.)

Features Multiple unit construction (achieved by mounting switches, LEDs, etc.) (center space) on the printed wiring board Good operability and high reliability

Mechanical


Rotation Torque (Detents Torque) 11 mN·m, 18 mN·m

Detents 18 points

Electrical

Output Signal Phase A and B


Rating 1 mA 10 Vdc



Insulation Resistance 50 m min. (at 250 Vdc)





20/12 mm Center Space Encoders

Type: EVQV6


Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQWF/VP

– EV58 –

11.5

23

23

2-1.64-0.75

2-φ1

.52-

φ2.5

162-2.

5

φ27

1528

28.2(29.4)

φ16.5

2-φ2.5

10.753.3

5

φ21.

6

C0.3

156

ComBA

11.5

27.4

5

23

16

1.5

2.1

φ1.5

3-φ1

2-R0.75

2-φ2.7


PWB thickness t=1.6

E

1

V W

2

Q F

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


1

E

1

V V

2

Q P

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


1

Specifi cations




CD players, etc.)


Mechanical


Rotation Torque (Detents Torque) 3 mN·m to 20 mN·m

Detents 18 points, 30 points

Electrical


Resolution 9 pulses/360 °, 15 pulses/360 °

Rating 1 mA 10 Vdc









Type: EVQWF/EVQVP


Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQV5

– EV59 –

E

1

V V

2

Q 5

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


1


PWB thickness t=1.6

2-2.

5

15

2-27

.9

6φ27

1515

28

28

7

1.5

14

12

22

φ21.

9

2.5

(29.6)

φ17.6

BA

COM

28.7(26.9)

2.5

1530

φ1.5

2–1.82–R0.9

2–4.

522

3–φ17

2

1.5 R0.75

Specifi cations




CD players, etc.)


Mechanical


Rotation Torque (Detents Torque) 9 mN·m, 13.5 mN·m, 18 mN·m

Detents 18 points, 30 points

Electrical


Resolution 9 pulses/360 °, 15 pulses/360 °

Rating 1 mA 10 Vdc









Type: EVQV5


Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQVN

– EV60 –

E

1

V V

2

Q N

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


1

40.1

φ31.40±0.15

22.8 20

6-11

2-2

2-φ1

.70

-0.1

50

CO.27.5

3.5

19.74-1.

52-

5.8

24

10

3.4 2-1.2

φ25.0±0.3

2-2.50

±0.15

15.80

±0.15

31.6

±0.3

31.6

0±0.

05

20.2

0±0.

0539.40±0.05

45.0°±0.5°

15.8

0±0.

05

4-4

4-R13.1

2-R13.1

27.35±0.30

2.5 2.5

2.3

7.9±0.

3

0.2±

0.1

20.2

φ38.42-1.2

18

3-0.8±0.12.5

BCOM

A

BCOM

3-φ1.0 0

2-φ1.8

2-R0.85

R19.05

+0.1

φ1.7 0+0.1

1.7 0+0.1

2-2.

80

+0.

1

2-1.5 0+0.1

A

2.52-1.2


PWB thickness t=1.6

Specifi cations




CD players, etc.)


Mechanical


Rotation Torque (Detents Torque) 20 mN·m

Detents 30 points

Electrical



Rating 1 mA 10 Vdc









Type: EVQVN


Oct. 201200


Encoders/EVQV0

– EV61 –

E

1

V V

2

Q 0

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12


1


PWB thickness t=1.6

COM A

BACOM B

3-2.511

53

(26.

2)

6-9±

0.2

6-2.

5±0.

2

2-1.55

3-31

.8±0

.2

3-φ6.5

53±0

.2

45°

33

R30.7 27.5

150°

150°

63.8

φ61max.

17

32.4

5

23.7

±0.4

φ42.4

3.5

45° 3-31

.8

2-19.95+0–0.2

φ48+

0 –0.2

2-3

+0 –0

.1

3-φ3.5+0.1–0

+0.1–0φ2

3-φ1+0.1–0

2-φ3.1+0.1–0

Specifi cations




CD players, etc.)


Mechanical


Rotation Torque (Detents Torque) 35 mN·m

Detents 30 points

Electrical



Rating 1 mA 10 Vdc









Type: EVQV0


Oct. 201200

P J 2013.4

E C B DA & I S CP C1006 K, K C,O 571-8506, J

Safely PrecautionsWhen using our products, no matter what sort of equipment they might be user for,be sure to confirm the applications and environmental conditions with our specifications in advance.

I

T A 2013.

T , , , , - . F , ( , , , , - , ), ' .

W , , .

T . T, , , , .

T ' . I - .

P J , “F E F T L” J.

T , P C.

G .

CATALOG Switches Potentiometers Encoders...(EVQ2) ES124 ES126 ES128 ES130 5N Type Side-operational...

Documents

Transcript of CATALOG Switches Potentiometers Encoders...(EVQ2) ES124 ES126 ES128 ES130 5N Type Side-operational...